PATENT DOCUMENT

Publication Number: US-9619076-B2
Application Number: US-201414536203-A
Country: US
Kind Code: B2

Title: Device, method, and graphical user interface for transitioning between display states in response to a gesture

Abstract:
An electronic device displays a user interface in a first display state. The device detects a first portion of a gesture on a touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact of the gesture. In response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, the device displays an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state. In response to detecting the end of the gesture: if intensity of the respective contact had reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to the end of the gesture, the device displays the second display state; otherwise, the device redisplays the first display state. After displaying an animated transition between a first display state and a second state, the device, optionally, detects an increase of the contact intensity. In response, the device displays a continuation of the animation in accordance with the increasing intensity of the respective contact.

Claims:
What is claimed is: 
     
       1. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a menu without displaying the menu; 
 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the menu, and 
 the preview of the menu is different from the menu; 
 
 detect an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the menu; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
     
     
       2. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein the intermediate display state is selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     
     
       3. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , including instructions which cause the device to:
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, wherein a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
 
     
     
       4. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , including instructions which cause the device to:
 generate an animated transition between the first display state and the second display state, wherein the animated transition includes the intermediate display state and the intermediate display state is mapped to an intensity of the contact detected at an end of the first portion of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display a portion of the animated transition between the first display state and the intermediate display state. 
 
     
     
       5. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein:
 detecting the first portion of the gesture includes detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact from a first intensity threshold to an intermediate intensity threshold; and 
 the non-transitory computer readable storage medium includes instructions which cause the device to, after displaying the intermediate display state:
 detect a second portion of the gesture, wherein the second portion of the gesture includes detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact from the intermediate intensity threshold to the predefined intensity threshold; and 
 in response to detecting the second portion of the gesture, display an animated transition between the intermediate display state and the second display state. 
 
 
     
     
       6. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting liftoff of the respective contact. 
     
     
       7. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact below an end-of-gesture intensity threshold. 
     
     
       8. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , wherein:
 detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact from above to below the predefined intensity threshold. 
 
     
     
       9. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 1 , including instructions which cause the device to:
 while detecting the gesture, detect an increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold; and 
 in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold, generate a tactile output that indicates that the second display state will continue to be displayed after an end of the gesture is detected. 
 
     
     
       10. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein the user interface is in a first display state; 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state; 
 while the intensity of the respective contact is at or below a predefined intensity threshold, display an animated transition from the first display state to the second display state, wherein the animated transition includes adjusting a parameter corresponding to a visual property of a set of one or more user interface objects in a predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact; 
 detect an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold; 
 in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold, display a continuation of the animated transition that includes adjusting the parameter in the predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact; 
 detect an end of the gesture; and, 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state. 
 
     
     
       11. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 10 , wherein the parameter is a parameter selected from the set consisting of: user interface object size, user interface object opacity, space between user interface objects, and number of options displayed in a menu. 
     
     
       12. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 10 , wherein the intermediate display state is selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     
     
       13. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 10 , including instructions which cause the device to:
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, wherein a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
 
     
     
       14. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 10 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting liftoff of the respective contact. 
     
     
       15. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a pop-up window without displaying the pop-up window; 
 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the pop-up window, and 
 the preview of the pop-up window is different from the pop-up window; 
 
 detect an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the pop-up window; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
     
     
       16. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 15 , wherein the intermediate display state is selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     
     
       17. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 15 , including instructions which cause the device to:
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, wherein a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
 
     
     
       18. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 15 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting liftoff of the respective contact. 
     
     
       19. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a hidden text without displaying the hidden text; 
 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the hidden text, and 
 the preview of the hidden text is different from the hidden text; 
 
 detect an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the hidden text; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
     
     
       20. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a plurality of user interface objects without displaying the plurality of user interface objects; 
 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects, and 
 the reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects are different from the user interface objects; 
 
 detect an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the user interface objects; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
     
     
       21. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a representation of an album; 
 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of components of the album, and 
 the preview of components of the album is different from the components of the album; 
 
 detect an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the components of the album; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
     
     
       22. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a plurality of user interface objects arranged on the display such that at least some objects overlap each other; 
 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying the user interface objects spread apart so that at least two of the plurality of user interface objects that formerly overlapped with each other do not overlap with each other while at least two the plurality of user interface objects overlap each other; 
 
 detect an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the plurality of user interface objects so that they do not overlap with each other; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
     
     
       23. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a current state of an electronic document; 
 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a beginning portion of an undo operation; 
 
 detect an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying a prior state of the document after the undo operation has been performed; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
     
     
       24. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a current state of an electronic document; 
 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a first prior state of the electronic document after a first undo operation has been performed; 
 
 detect an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying a second prior state of the electronic document after a second undo operation has been performed; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
     
     
       25. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:
 display a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying one or more tabs in a tabbed document interface; 
 
 detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of a new tab in the tabbed document interface; 
 
 detect an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, display the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the new tab in the tabbed document interface; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
     
     
       26. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a menu without displaying the menu; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the menu, and 
 the preview of the menu is different from the menu; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the menu; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       27. The device of  claim 26 , wherein the intermediate display state is selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     
     
       28. The device of  claim 26 , including instructions for:
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, wherein a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
 
     
     
       29. The device of  claim 26 , including instructions for:
 generating an animated transition between the first display state and the second display state, wherein the animated transition includes the intermediate display state and the intermediate display state is mapped to an intensity of the contact detected at an end of the first portion of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying a portion of the animated transition between the first display state and the intermediate display state. 
 
     
     
       30. The device of  claim 26 , wherein:
 detecting the first portion of the gesture includes detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact from a first intensity threshold to an intermediate intensity threshold; and 
 the device includes instructions for, after displaying the intermediate display state:
 detecting a second portion of the gesture, wherein the second portion of the gesture includes detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact from the intermediate intensity threshold to the predefined intensity threshold; and 
 in response to detecting the second portion of the gesture, displaying an animated transition between the intermediate display state and the second display state. 
 
 
     
     
       31. The device of  claim 26 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting liftoff of the respective contact. 
     
     
       32. The device of  claim 26 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact below an end-of-gesture intensity threshold. 
     
     
       33. The device of  claim 26 , wherein:
 detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact from above to below the predefined intensity threshold. 
 
     
     
       34. The device of  claim 26 , including instructions for:
 while detecting the gesture, detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold; and 
 in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold, generating a tactile output that indicates that the second display state will continue to be displayed after an end of the gesture is detected. 
 
     
     
       35. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a menu without displaying the menu; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the menu, and 
 the preview of the menu is different from the menu; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the menu; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       36. The method of  claim 35 , wherein the intermediate display state is selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     
     
       37. The method of  claim 35 , including:
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, wherein a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
 
     
     
       38. The method of  claim 35 , including:
 generating an animated transition between the first display state and the second display state, wherein the animated transition includes the intermediate display state and the intermediate display state is mapped to an intensity of the contact detected at an end of the first portion of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying a portion of the animated transition between the first display state and the intermediate display state. 
 
     
     
       39. The method of  claim 35 , wherein:
 detecting the first portion of the gesture includes detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact from a first intensity threshold to an intermediate intensity threshold; and 
 the method includes, after displaying the intermediate display state:
 detecting a second portion of the gesture, wherein the second portion of the gesture includes detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact from the intermediate intensity threshold to the predefined intensity threshold; and 
 in response to detecting the second portion of the gesture, displaying an animated transition between the intermediate display state and the second display state. 
 
 
     
     
       40. The method of  claim 35 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting liftoff of the respective contact. 
     
     
       41. The method of  claim 35 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact below an end-of-gesture intensity threshold. 
     
     
       42. The method of  claim 35 , wherein:
 detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact from above to below the predefined intensity threshold. 
 
     
     
       43. The method of  claim 35 , including:
 while detecting the gesture, detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold; and 
 in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold, generating a tactile output that indicates that the second display state will continue to be displayed after an end of the gesture is detected. 
 
     
     
       44. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein the user interface is in a first display state; 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state; 
 while the intensity of the respective contact is at or below a predefined intensity threshold, displaying an animated transition from the first display state to the second display state, wherein the animated transition includes adjusting a parameter corresponding to a visual property of a set of one or more user interface objects in a predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact; 
 detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold; 
 in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold, displaying a continuation of the animated transition that includes adjusting the parameter in the predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact; 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and, 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state. 
 
 
     
     
       45. The device of  claim 44 , wherein the intermediate display state is selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     
     
       46. The device of  claim 44 , including instructions for:
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, wherein a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
 
     
     
       47. The device of  claim 44 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting liftoff of the respective contact. 
     
     
       48. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein the user interface is in a first display state; 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state; 
 while the intensity of the respective contact is at or below a predefined intensity threshold, displaying an animated transition from the first display state to the second display state, wherein the animated transition includes adjusting a parameter corresponding to a visual property of a set of one or more user interface objects in a predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact; 
 detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold; 
 in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold, displaying a continuation of the animated transition that includes adjusting the parameter in the predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact; 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and, 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state. 
 
 
     
     
       49. The method of  claim 48 , wherein the intermediate display state is selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     
     
       50. The method of  claim 48 , including:
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, wherein a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
 
     
     
       51. The method of  claim 48 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting liftoff of the respective contact. 
     
     
       52. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a pop-up window without displaying the pop-up window; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the pop-up window, and 
 the preview of the pop-up window is different from the pop-up window; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the pop-up window; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       53. The device of  claim 52 , wherein the intermediate display state is selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     
     
       54. The device of  claim 52 , including instructions for:
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, wherein a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
 
     
     
       55. The device of  claim 52 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting liftoff of the respective contact. 
     
     
       56. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a pop-up window without displaying the pop-up window; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the pop-up window, and 
 the preview of the pop-up window is different from the pop-up window; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the pop-up window; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       57. The method of  claim 56 , wherein the intermediate display state is selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     
     
       58. The method of  claim 56 , including:
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, wherein a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
 
     
     
       59. The method of  claim 56 , wherein detecting the end of the gesture includes detecting liftoff of the respective contact. 
     
     
       60. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a hidden text without displaying the hidden text; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the hidden text, and 
 the preview of the hidden text is different from the hidden text; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the hidden text; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       61. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a hidden text without displaying the hidden text; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the hidden text, and 
 the preview of the hidden text is different from the hidden text; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the hidden text; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       62. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a plurality of user interface objects without displaying the plurality of user interface objects; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects, and 
 the reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects are different from the user interface objects; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the user interface objects; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       63. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying an icon that corresponds to a plurality of user interface objects without displaying the plurality of user interface objects; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects, and 
 the reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects are different from the user interface objects; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the user interface objects; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       64. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a representation of an album; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of components of the album, and 
 the preview of components of the album is different from the components of the album; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the components of the album; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       65. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a representation of an album; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of components of the album, and 
 the preview of components of the album is different from the components of the album; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the components of the album; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       66. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a plurality of user interface objects arranged on the display such that at least some objects overlap each other; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying the user interface objects spread apart so that at least two of the plurality of user interface objects that formerly overlapped with each other do not overlap with each other while at least two the plurality of user interface objects overlap each other; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the plurality of user interface objects so that they do not overlap with each other; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       67. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a plurality of user interface objects arranged on the display such that at least some objects overlap each other; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying the user interface objects spread apart so that at least two of the plurality of user interface objects that formerly overlapped with each other do not overlap with each other while at least two the plurality of user interface objects overlap each other; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the plurality of user interface objects so that they do not overlap with each other; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       68. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a current state of an electronic document; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a beginning portion of an undo operation; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying a prior state of the document after the undo operation has been performed; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       69. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a current state of an electronic document; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a beginning portion of an undo operation; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying a prior state of the document after the undo operation has been performed; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       70. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a current state of an electronic document; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a first prior state of the electronic document after a first undo operation has been performed; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying a second prior state of the electronic document after a second undo operation has been performed; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       71. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying a current state of an electronic document; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a first prior state of the electronic document after a first undo operation has been performed; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying a second prior state of the electronic document after a second undo operation has been performed; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       72. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying one or more tabs in a tabbed document interface; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of a new tab in the tabbed document interface; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the new tab in the tabbed document interface; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
 
 
 
     
     
       73. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying a user interface on the display, wherein:
 the user interface is in a first display state, and 
 displaying the user interface in the first display state includes displaying one or more tabs in a tabbed document interface; 
 
 detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 
 in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state, wherein:
 displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of a new tab in the tabbed document interface; 
 
 detecting an end of the gesture; and 
 in response to detecting the end of the gesture:
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state, wherein displaying the second display state includes displaying the new tab in the tabbed document interface; and 
 in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state.

Description:
RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     This application is a continuation of PCT Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/040093, filed on May 8, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning between Display States in Response to a Gesture,” which claims the benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,265, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning between Display States in Response to a Gesture;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/747,278, filed Dec. 29, 2012, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Manipulating User Interface Objects with Visual and/or Haptic Feedback;” and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/688,227, filed May 9, 2012, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Manipulating User Interface Objects with Visual and/or Haptic Feedback,” which applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties. 
     This application is also related to the following: U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,092, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Selecting Object within a Group of Objects;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,125, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Navigating User Interface Hierarchies;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,156, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Manipulating Framed Graphical Objects;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,179, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Scrolling Nested Regions;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,171, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying Additional Information in Response to a User Contact;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,191, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,211, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Facilitating User Interaction with Controls in a User Interface;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,239, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Forgoing Generation of Tactile Output for a Multi-Contact Gesture;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,284, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Providing Tactile Feedback for Operations Performed in a User Interface;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,287, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Providing Feedback for Changing Activation States of a User Interface Object;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,363, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,367, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Moving a User Interface Object Based on an Intensity of a Press Input;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,373, filed on Mar. 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Managing Activation of a Control Based on Contact Intensity;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,412, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying Content Associated with a Corresponding Affordance;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,413, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Selecting User Interface Objects;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,414, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Moving and Dropping a User Interface Object;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,416, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Determining Whether to Scroll or Select Content;” and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/778,418, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Switching between User Interfaces,” which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. 
     This application is also related to the following: U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/645,033, filed on May 9, 2012, entitled “Adaptive Haptic Feedback for Electronic Devices;” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/665,603, filed on Jun. 28, 2012, entitled “Adaptive Haptic Feedback for Electronic Devices;” and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/681,098, filed on Aug. 8, 2012, entitled “Adaptive Haptic Feedback for Electronic Devices,” which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. 
    
    
     TECHNICAL FIELD 
     This relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces that detect inputs for manipulating user interfaces. 
     BACKGROUND 
     The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recent years. Exemplary touch-sensitive surfaces include touch pads and touch screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to manipulate user interface objects on a display. 
     Exemplary manipulations include adjusting the position and/or size of one or more user interface objects or activating buttons or opening files/applications represented by user interface objects, as well as associating metadata with one or more user interface objects or otherwise manipulating user interfaces. Exemplary user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, control elements such as buttons and other graphics. A user will, in some circumstances, need to perform such manipulations on user interface objects in a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), an image management application (e.g., Aperture or iPhoto from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a digital content (e.g., videos and music) management application (e.g., iTunes from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a drawing application, a presentation application (e.g., Keynote from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a word processing application (e.g., Pages from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a website creation application (e.g., iWeb from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a disk authoring application (e.g., iDVD from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), or a spreadsheet application (e.g., Numbers from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.). 
     But existing methods for performing these manipulations are cumbersome and inefficient. In addition, existing methods take longer than necessary, thereby wasting energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices. 
     SUMMARY 
     Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for manipulating user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for manipulating user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges. 
     The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch screen display”). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI primarily through finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, website creating, disk authoring, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, and/or digital video playing. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. 
     There is a need for electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for providing visual feedback for operations performed on an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen). More specifically, there is a need for providing a preview of a new state in response to an initial portion of a gesture (e.g., a press input), and determining whether to return to a previous state or to enter the new state at the end of the gesture. Methods and interfaces described herein address such needs and provide various visual feedbacks based on an intensity of a contact used to perform the gesture. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for responding to a gesture. Such methods and interfaces provide helpful information to the user, reduce the cognitive burden on a user, and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces may conserve power and increase the time between battery charges. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a user interface on the display, where the user interface is in a first display state; detecting a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, displaying an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state; detecting an end of the gesture; and in response to detecting the end of the gesture: in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the second display state; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminating display of the intermediate display state and redisplaying the first display state. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display at least a user interface in a first display state; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit, including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, cause the display unit to display an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state; detect an end of the gesture; and in response to detecting the end of the gesture: in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, cause the display unit to display the second display state; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, cause the display unit to terminate display of the intermediate display state and redisplay the first display state. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a user interface on the display, where the user interface is in a first display state; detecting a first input that includes detecting an increase in intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first input, displaying a first animation of the user interface transitioning from the first display state to a second display state, where a rate of change from the first display state to the second display state is determined in accordance with an intensity of the contact included in the first input. The method further includes, after the user interface has transitioned to the second display state: detecting a second input that includes detecting an increase in intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and in response to detecting the second input, displaying a second animation of the user interface transitioning from the second display state to a third display state, where the second animation is a continuation of the first animation and the third display state is determined in accordance with the intensity of the contact included in the second input on the touch-sensitive surface; detecting a reduction in the intensity of the contact included in the second input; and in response to detecting the reduction in the intensity of the contact included in the second input, displaying a third animation of the user interface transitioning from the third display state to the second display state. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display at least a user interface in a first display state; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a first input that includes detecting an increase in intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the first input, cause the display unit to display a first animation of the user interface transitioning from the first display state to a second display state, where a rate of change from the first display state to the second display state is determined in accordance with an intensity of the contact included in the first input. The processing unit is further configured to, after the user interface has transitioned to the second display state: detect a second input that includes detecting an increase in intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and in response to detecting the second input, cause the display unit to display a second animation of the user interface transitioning from the second display state to a third display state, where the second animation is a continuation of the first animation and the third display state is determined in accordance with the intensity of the contact included in the second input on the touch-sensitive surface unit; detect a reduction in the intensity of the contact included in the second input; and in response to detecting the reduction in the intensity of the contact included in the second input, cause the display unit to display a third animation of the user interface transitioning from the third display state to the second display state. 
     Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for providing appropriate and informative visual feedbacks in response to a gesture, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for responding to a gesture. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, one or more processors, memory, and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors and the one or more programs include instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods referred to in the fifth paragraph of the Description of Embodiments. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods referred to in the fift paragraph of the Description of Embodiments. In accordance with some embodiments, a computer readable storage medium has stored therein instructions which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform the operations of any of the methods referred to in the fifth paragraph of the Description of Embodiments . In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes: a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; and means for performing the operations of any of the methods referred to in the fifth paragraph of the Description of Embodiments. In accordance with some embodiments, an information processing apparatus, for use in an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, includes means for performing the operations of any of the methods referred to in the fifth paragraph of the Description of Embodiments. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures. 
         FIG. 1A  is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 1B  is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 2  illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 3  is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 4A  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 4B  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 I 16  illustrate example user interfaces for providing visual feedback for a gesture in accordance with changes in intensity of a contact in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 6A-6G  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of providing visual feedback for a gesture in accordance with changes in intensity of a contact in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 6H-6M  are flow diagrams illustrating another method of providing visual feedback for a gesture in accordance with changes in intensity of a contact in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 7  is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
     
    
    
     DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS 
     The methods, devices and GUIs described herein provide visual and/or haptic feedback that makes manipulation of user interface objects more efficient and intuitive for a user. For example, in a system where the clicking action of a trackpad is decoupled from the contact intensity (e.g., contact force, contact pressure, or a substitute therefore) that is needed to reach an activation threshold, the device can generate different tactile outputs (e.g., “different clicks”) for different activation events (e.g., so that clicks that accomplish a particular result are differentiated from clicks that do not produce any result or that accomplish a different result from the particular result). Additionally, tactile outputs can be generated in response to other events that are not related to increasing intensity of a contact, such as generating a tactile output (e.g., a “detent”) when a user interface object is moved to a particular position, boundary or orientation, or when an event occurs at the device. 
     Additionally, in a system where a trackpad or touch-screen display is sensitive to a range of contact intensity that includes more than one or two specific intensity values (e.g., more than a simple on/off, binary intensity determination), the user interface can provide responses (e.g., visual or tactile cues) that are indicative of the intensity of the contact within the range. In some implementations, a pre-activation-threshold response and/or a post-activation-threshold response to an input are displayed as continuous animations. As one example of such a response, a preview of an operation is displayed in response to detecting an increase in contact intensity that is still below an activation threshold for performing the operation. As another example of such a response, an animation associated with an operation continues even after the activation threshold for the operation has been reached. Both of these examples provide a user with a continuous response to the force or pressure of a user&#39;s contact, which provides a user with visual and/or haptic feedback that is richer and more intuitive. More specifically, such continuous force responses give the user the experience of being able to press lightly to preview an operation and/or press deeply to push “past” or “through” a predefined user interface state corresponding to the operation. 
     Additionally, for a device with a touch-sensitive surface that is sensitive to a range of contact intensity, multiple contact intensity thresholds can be monitored by the device and different functions can be mapped to different contact intensity thresholds. This serves to increase the available “gesture space” providing easy access to advanced features for users who know that increasing the intensity of a contact at or beyond a second “deep press” intensity threshold will cause the device to perform a different operation from an operation that would be performed if the intensity of the contact is between a first “activation” intensity threshold and the second “deep press” intensity threshold. An advantage of assigning additional functionality to a second “deep press” intensity threshold while maintaining familiar functionality at a first “activation” intensity threshold is that inexperienced users who are, in some circumstances, confused by the additional functionality can use the familiar functionality by just applying an intensity up to the first “activation” intensity threshold, whereas more experienced users can take advantage of the additional functionality by applying an intensity at the second “deep press” intensity threshold. 
     Additionally, for a device with a touch-sensitive surface that is sensitive to a range of contact intensity, the device can provide additional functionality by allowing users to perform complex operations with a single continuous contact. For example, when selecting a group of objects, a user can move a continuous contact around the touch-sensitive surface and can press while dragging (e.g., applying an intensity greater than a “deep press” intensity threshold) to add additional elements to a selection. In this way, a user can intuitively interact with a user interface where pressing harder with a contact causes objects in the user interface to be “stickier.” 
     A number of different approaches to providing an intuitive user interface on a device where a clicking action is decoupled from the force that is needed to reach an activation threshold and/or the device is sensitive to a wide range of contact intensities are described below. Using one or more of these approaches (optionally in conjunction with each other) helps to provide a user interface that intuitively provides users with additional information and functionality, thereby reducing the user&#39;s cognitive burden and improving the human-machine interface. Such improvements in the human-machine interface enable users to use the device faster and more efficiently. For battery-operated devices, these improvements conserve power and increase the time between battery charges. For ease of explanation, systems, methods and user interfaces for including illustrative examples of some of these approaches are described below, as follows:
         Some methods for providing visual feedback in response to user input involve a binary switch between display states with a single trigger condition. Thus, in some embodiments, with these methods, no visual feedback is provided before the single trigger condition is reached, and an abrupt switch from a current display state to a new display state occurs as soon as the single trigger threshold is reached. In some embodiments described herein, an improved method for providing visual feedback in response to user input is achieved by providing a preview of an augmented display state (e.g., an animation including one or more intermediate display states between an initial display state and the augmented display state is displayed in accordance with an intensity of a contact). This method provides the user with an opportunity to preview the effect of a completed input before the user finally completes the input (e.g., providing a contact intensity above a predefined intensity threshold) and commits to the effect. Below,  FIGS. 5A-5I  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing visual feedback for a gesture in accordance with changes in intensity of a contact.  FIGS. 6A-6G  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  13900  of providing visual feedback for a gesture in accordance with changes in intensity of a contact. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 5A-5I  are used to illustrate the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6G .  FIGS. 6H-6M  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  13950  of providing visual feedback for a gesture in accordance with changes in intensity of a contact. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 5A-5I  are also used to illustrate the processes in  FIGS. 6H-6M .       

     EXEMPLARY DEVICES 
     Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the various described embodiments. However, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the various described embodiments may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments. 
     It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they are not the same contact. 
     The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a”, “an” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. 
     As used herein, the term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context. 
     Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touch pads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touch pad). 
     In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick. 
     The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application. 
     The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user. 
     Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays.  FIG. 1A  is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device  100  with touch-sensitive displays  112  in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display  112  is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes known as or called a touch-sensitive display system. Device  100  includes memory  102  (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums), memory controller  122 , one or more processing units (CPU&#39;s)  120 , peripherals interface  118 , RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem  106 , other input or control devices  116 , and external port  124 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more optical sensors  164 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensity of contacts on device  100  (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100 ). Device  100  optionally includes one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs on device  100  (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100  or touchpad  355  of device  300 ). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines  103 . 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user&#39;s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user&#39;s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user&#39;s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user. 
     It should be appreciated that device  100  is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device  100  optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in  FIG. 1A  are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits. 
     Memory  102  optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory  102  by other components of device  100 , such as CPU  120  and the peripherals interface  118 , is, optionally, controlled by memory controller  122 . 
     Peripherals interface  118  can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU  120  and memory  102 . The one or more processors  120  run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory  102  to perform various functions for device  100  and to process data. 
     In some embodiments, peripherals interface  118 , CPU  120 , and memory controller  122  are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip  104 . In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips. 
     RF (radio frequency) circuitry  108  receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry  108  optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. 
     Audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , and microphone  113  provide an audio interface between a user and device  100 . Audio circuitry  110  receives audio data from peripherals interface  118 , converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker  111 . Speaker  111  converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  also receives electrical signals converted by microphone  113  from sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface  118  for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory  102  and/or RF circuitry  108  by peripherals interface  118 . In some embodiments, audio circuitry  110  also includes a headset jack (e.g.,  212 ,  FIG. 2 ). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry  110  and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone). 
     I/O subsystem  106  couples input/output peripherals on device  100 , such as touch screen  112  and other input control devices  116 , to peripherals interface  118 . I/O subsystem  106  optionally includes display controller  156 , optical sensor controller  158 , intensity sensor controller  159 , haptic feedback controller  161  and one or more input controllers  160  for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers  160  receive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices  116 . The other input control devices  116  optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s)  160  are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g.,  208 ,  FIG. 2 ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker  111  and/or microphone  113 . The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g.,  206 ,  FIG. 2 ). 
     Touch-sensitive display  112  provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller  156  receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen  112 . Touch screen  112  displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user-interface objects. 
     Touch screen  112  has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch screen  112  and display controller  156  (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory  102 ) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen  112  and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch screen  112 . In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch screen  112  and the user corresponds to a finger of the user. 
     Touch screen  112  optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch screen  112  and display controller  156  optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen  112 . In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. 
     Touch screen  112  optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user optionally makes contact with touch screen  112  using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user. 
     In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device  100  optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen  112  or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen. 
     Device  100  also includes power system  162  for powering the various components. Power system  162  optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more optical sensors  164 .  FIG. 1A  shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller  158  in I/O subsystem  106 . Optical sensor  164  optionally includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor  164  receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module  143  (also called a camera module), optical sensor  164  optionally captures still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch screen display  112  on the front of the device, so that the touch screen display is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user&#39;s image is, optionally, obtained for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165 .  FIG. 1A  shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller  159  in I/O subsystem  106 . Contact intensity sensor  165  optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor  165  receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch screen display  112  which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors  166 .  FIG. 1A  shows proximity sensor  166  coupled to peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, proximity sensor  166  is coupled to input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen  112  when the multifunction device is placed near the user&#39;s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call). 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators  167 .  FIG. 1A  shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller  161  in I/O subsystem  106 . Tactile output generator  167  optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact intensity sensor  165  receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module  133  and generates tactile outputs on device  100  that are capable of being sensed by a user of device  100 . In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device  100 ) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device  100 ). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch screen display  112  which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more accelerometers  168 .  FIG. 1A  shows accelerometer  168  coupled to peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, accelerometer  168  is, optionally, coupled to an input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device  100  optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s)  168 , a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device  100 . 
     In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory  102  include operating system  126 , communication module (or set of instructions)  128 , contact/motion module (or set of instructions)  130 , graphics module (or set of instructions)  132 , text input module (or set of instructions)  134 , Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions)  135 , and applications (or sets of instructions)  136 . Furthermore, in some embodiments memory  102  stores device/global internal state  157 , as shown in  FIGS. 1A and 3 . Device/global internal state  157  includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display  112 ; sensor state, including information obtained from the device&#39;s various sensors and input control devices  116 ; and location information concerning the device&#39;s location and/or attitude. 
     Operating system  126  (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components. 
     Communication module  128  facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports  124  and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry  108  and/or external port  124 . External port  124  (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used on iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices. 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects contact with touch screen  112  (in conjunction with display controller  156 ) and other touch sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module  130  includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact) determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module  130  receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  and display controller  156  detect contact on a touchpad. 
     In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device  100 ). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined thresholds values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter). 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns and intensities. Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event. 
     Graphics module  132  includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen  112  or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations and the like. 
     In some embodiments, graphics module  132  stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module  132  receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller  156 . 
     Haptic feedback module  133  includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s)  167  to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device  100  in response to user interactions with device  100 . 
     Text input module  134 , which is, optionally, a component of graphics module  132 , provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts  137 , e-mail  140 , IM  141 , browser  147 , and any other application that needs text input). 
     GPS module  135  determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone  138  for use in location-based dialing, to camera  143  as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets). 
     Applications  136  optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
         contacts module  137  (sometimes called an address book or contact list);   telephone module  138 ;   video conferencing module  139 ;   e-mail client module  140 ;   instant messaging (IM) module  141 ;   workout support module  142 ;   camera module  143  for still and/or video images;   image management module  144 ;   browser module  147 ;   calendar module  148 ;   widget modules  149 , which optionally include one or more of: weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , dictionary widget  149 - 5 , and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   widget creator module  150  for making user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   search module  151 ;   video and music player module  152 , which is, optionally, made up of a video player module and a music player module;   notes module  153 ;   map module  154 ; and/or   online video module  155 .       

     Examples of other applications  136  that are, optionally, stored in memory  102  include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication. 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , contacts module  137  are, optionally, used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state  192  of contacts module  137  in memory  102  or memory  370 ), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone  138 , video conference  139 , e-mail  140 , or IM  141 ; and so forth. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , telephone module  138  are, optionally, used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book  137 , modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , contact list  137 , and telephone module  138 , videoconferencing module  139  includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140  includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module  144 , e-mail client module  140  makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module  143 . 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , the instant messaging module  141  includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , map module  154 , and music player module  146 , workout support module  142  includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data. 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor(s)  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and image management module  144 , camera module  143  includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory  102 , modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory  102 . 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and camera module  143 , image management module  144  includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , browser module  147  includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , calendar module  148  includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , widget modules  149  are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , and dictionary widget  149 - 5 ) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget  149 - 6 ). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , the widget creator module  150  are, optionally, used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget). 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , search module  151  includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory  102  that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , and browser module  147 , video and music player module  152  includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen  112  or on an external, connected display via external port  124 ). In some embodiments, device  100  optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.). 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , notes module  153  includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch screen  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , and browser module  147 , map module  154  are, optionally, used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch screen  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , online video module  155  includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port  124 ), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module  141 , rather than e-mail client module  140 , is used to send a link to a particular online video. 
     Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  102  optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory  102  optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. 
     In some embodiments, device  100  is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device  100 , the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device  100  is, optionally, reduced. 
     The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device  100  to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device  100 . In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad. 
       FIG. 1B  is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  102  (in  FIG. 1A ) or  370  ( FIG. 3 ) includes event sorter  170  (e.g., in operating system  126 ) and a respective application  136 - 1  (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications  137 - 151 ,  155 ,  380 - 390 ). 
     Event sorter  170  receives event information and determines the application  136 - 1  and application view  191  of application  136 - 1  to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter  170  includes event monitor  171  and event dispatcher module  174 . In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes application internal state  192 , which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch sensitive display  112  when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state  157  is used by event sorter  170  to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state  192  is used by event sorter  170  to determine application views  191  to which to deliver event information. 
     In some embodiments, application internal state  192  includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application  136 - 1  resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application  136 - 1 , a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application  136 - 1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user. 
     Event monitor  171  receives event information from peripherals interface  118 . Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display  112 , as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface  118  transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem  106  or a sensor, such as proximity sensor  166 , accelerometer(s)  168 , and/or microphone  113  (through audio circuitry  110 ). Information that peripherals interface  118  receives from I/O subsystem  106  includes information from touch-sensitive display  112  or a touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, event monitor  171  sends requests to the peripherals interface  118  at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface  118  transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripheral interface  118  transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration). 
     In some embodiments, event sorter  170  also includes a hit view determination module  172  and/or an active event recognizer determination module  173 . 
     Hit view determination module  172  provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touch sensitive display  112  displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display. 
     Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture. 
     Hit view determination module  172  receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module  172  identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view. 
     Active event recognizer determination module  173  determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views. 
     Event dispatcher module  174  dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer  180 ). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module  173 , event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module  173 . In some embodiments, event dispatcher module  174  stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module  182 . 
     In some embodiments, operating system  126  includes event sorter  170 . Alternatively, application  136 - 1  includes event sorter  170 . In yet other embodiments, event sorter  170  is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory  102 , such as contact/motion module  130 . 
     In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes a plurality of event handlers  190  and one or more application views  191 , each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application&#39;s user interface. Each application view  191  of the application  136 - 1  includes one or more event recognizers  180 . Typically, a respective application view  191  includes a plurality of event recognizers  180 . In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers  180  are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application  136 - 1  inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler  190  includes one or more of: data updater  176 , object updater  177 , GUI updater  178 , and/or event data  179  received from event sorter  170 . Event handler  190  optionally utilizes or calls data updater  176 , object updater  177  or GUI updater  178  to update the application internal state  192 . Alternatively, one or more of the application views  191  includes one or more respective event handlers  190 . Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a respective application view  191 . 
     A respective event recognizer  180  receives event information (e.g., event data  179 ) from event sorter  170 , and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer  180  includes event receiver  182  and event comparator  184 . In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  also includes at least a subset of: metadata  183 , and event delivery instructions  188  (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions). 
     Event receiver  182  receives event information from event sorter  170 . The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device. 
     Event comparator  184  compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  includes event definitions  186 . Event definitions  186  contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event  1  ( 187 - 1 ), event  2  ( 187 - 2 ), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event  187  include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event  1  ( 187 - 1 ) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event  2  ( 187 - 2 ) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display  112 , and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers  190 . 
     In some embodiments, event definition  187  includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display  112 , when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display  112 , event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler  190 , the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler  190  should be activated. For example, event comparator  184  selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test. 
     In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event  187  also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer&#39;s event type. 
     When a respective event recognizer  180  determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions  186 , the respective event recognizer  180  enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  includes metadata  183  with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  activates event handler  190  associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  delivers event information associated with the event to event handler  190 . Activating an event handler  190  is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler  190  associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process. 
     In some embodiments, event delivery instructions  188  include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process. 
     In some embodiments, data updater  176  creates and updates data used in application  136 - 1 . For example, data updater  176  updates the telephone number used in contacts module  137 , or stores a video file used in video player module  145 . In some embodiments, object updater  177  creates and updates objects used in application  136 - 1 . For example, object updater  176  creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater  178  updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater  178  prepares display information and sends it to graphics module  132  for display on a touch-sensitive display. 
     In some embodiments, event handler(s)  190  includes or has access to data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178 . In some embodiments, data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a single module of a respective application  136 - 1  or application view  191 . In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules. 
     It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices  100  with input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized. 
       FIG. 2  illustrates a portable multifunction device  100  having a touch screen  112  in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI)  200 . In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers  202  (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses  203  (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device  100 . In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button  204 . As described previously, menu button  204  is, optionally, used to navigate to any application  136  in a set of applications that are, optionally executed on device  100 . Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen  112 . 
     In one embodiment, device  100  includes touch screen  112 , menu button  204 , push button  206  for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s)  208 , Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot  210 , head set jack  212 , and docking/charging external port  124 . Push button  206  is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device  100  also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone  113 . Device  100  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen  112  and/or one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  100 . 
       FIG. 3  is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device  300  need not be portable. In some embodiments, device  300  is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child&#39;s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device  300  typically includes one or more processing units (CPU&#39;s)  310 , one or more network or other communications interfaces  360 , memory  370 , and one or more communication buses  320  for interconnecting these components. Communication buses  320  optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device  300  includes input/output (I/O) interface  330  comprising display  340 , which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface  330  also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device)  350  and touchpad  355 , tactile output generator  357  for generating tactile outputs on device  300  (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s)  167  described above with reference to  FIG. 1A ), sensors  359  (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s)  165  described above with reference to  FIG. 1A ). Memory  370  includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory  370  optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s)  310 . In some embodiments, memory  370  stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100  ( FIG. 1A ), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory  370  optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100 . For example, memory  370  of device  300  optionally stores drawing module  380 , presentation module  382 , word processing module  384 , website creation module  386 , disk authoring module  388 , and/or spreadsheet module  390 , while memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100  ( FIG. 1A ) optionally does not store these modules. 
     Each of the above identified elements in  FIG. 3  are, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above identified modules or programs (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  370  optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory  370  optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. 
     Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) that is, optionally, implemented on portable multifunction device  100 . 
       FIG. 4A  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device  100  in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device  300 . In some embodiments, user interface  400  includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
         Signal strength indicator(s)  402  for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;   Time  404 ;   Bluetooth indicator  405 ;   Battery status indicator  406 ;   Tray  408  with icons for frequently used applications, such as:
           Icon  416  for telephone module  138 , labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator  414  of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;   Icon  418  for e-mail client module  140 , labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator  410  of the number of unread e-mails;   Icon  420  for browser module  147 , labeled “Browser;” and   Icon  422  for video and music player module  152 , also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module  152 , labeled “iPod;” and   
           Icons for other applications, such as:
           Icon  424  for IM module  141 , labeled “Text;”   Icon  426  for calendar module  148 , labeled “Calendar;”   Icon  428  for image management module  144 , labeled “Photos;”   Icon  430  for camera module  143 , labeled “Camera;”   Icon  432  for online video module  155 , labeled “Online Video”   Icon  434  for stocks widget  149 - 2 , labeled “Stocks;”   Icon  436  for map module  154 , labeled “Map;”   Icon  438  for weather widget  149 - 1 , labeled “Weather;”   Icon  440  for alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , labeled “Clock;”   Icon  442  for workout support module  142 , labeled “Workout Support;”   Icon  444  for notes module  153 , labeled “Notes;” and   Icon  446  for a settings application or module, which provides access to settings for device  100  and its various applications  136 .   
               

     It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in  FIG. 4A  are merely exemplary. For example, icon  422  for video and music player module  152  are labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon. 
       FIG. 4B  illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 ) with a touch-sensitive surface  451  (e.g., a tablet or touchpad  355 ,  FIG. 3 ) that is separate from the display  450  (e.g., touch screen display  112 ). Device  300  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors  357 ) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface  451  and/or one or more tactile output generators  359  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  300 . 
     Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display  112  (where the touch sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in  FIG. 4B . In some embodiments the touch sensitive surface (e.g.,  451  in  FIG. 4B ) has a primary axis (e.g.,  452  in  FIG. 4B ) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g.,  453  in  FIG. 4B ) on the display (e.g.,  450 ). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g.,  460  and  462  in  FIG. 4B ) with the touch-sensitive surface  451  at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in  FIG. 4B, 460  corresponds to  468  and  462  corresponds to  470 ). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts  460  and  462 , and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  451  in  FIG. 4B ) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g.,  450  in  FIG. 4B ) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein. 
     Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously. 
     As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad  355  in  FIG. 3  or touch-sensitive surface  451  in  FIG. 4B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch-screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112  in  FIG. 1A  or touch screen  112  in  FIG. 4A ) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch-screen display, a detected contact on the touch-screen acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch-screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch-screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user&#39;s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device). 
     The user interface figures described below include various intensity diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , a light press intensity threshold IT L , a deep press intensity threshold IT D , and/or one or more other intensity thresholds). This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretation of the figures. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with an intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures. 
     An increase of intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold IT L  to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold IT D  to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  to an intensity below the contact intensity threshold IT 0  is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments IT 0  is zero. In some embodiments IT 0  is greater than zero. In some illustrations a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact. 
     In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input). 
     In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90% or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances). 
     For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. 
     USER INTERFACES AND ASSOCIATED PROCESSES 
     Transitioning Between Display States in Response to a Gesture 
     Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces that provide visual feedback to operations performed by a user. For example, when a user invokes a user interface element (e.g., an icon, or a button, etc.) displayed on a graphical user interface using an input (e.g., a click or a gesture), the appearance of the user interface can change to indicate the effect of the operation performed by the input. Some methods for providing visual feedback in response to user input frequently involve a binary switch between display states with a single trigger threshold. Thus, in some embodiments, with these methods, no visual feedback is provided before the single trigger threshold is reached, and an abrupt switch from a current display state to a new display state occurs as soon as the single trigger threshold is reached. In addition, no subsequent visual feedback is provided after the user interface has switched to the new display state even if the user input causing the switch has not been terminated. 
     In some embodiments described herein, an improved method for providing visual feedback in response to user input is achieved by: providing a user interface in an initial display state; when a first portion of a gesture is detected, where the first portion of the gesture is indicative of a respective intended operation and completion of the operation is associated with a respective augmented display state, providing a preview of the augmented display state (e.g., an animation including one or more intermediate display states between the initial display state and the augmented display state); and when the end of the gesture is detected, displaying either the augmented display state or redisplaying the initial display state depending on whether an intensity of a contact of the gesture had reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to the end of the gesture. This method provides the user with an opportunity to preview (e.g., the intermediate display states) the effect of a completed gesture before the user finally completes the gesture (e.g., providing a contact intensity above the predefined intensity threshold) and commits to the effect. During the preview, the user is allowed to cancel the gesture before completing the gesture or to continue with the gesture and commit to the effect. 
     In addition, an improved method for providing visual feedback in response to user input is achieved by: after providing a first animation to represent a transition from an initial display state to an augmented display state in accordance with an increase in contact intensity of a first input (e.g., an initial portion of a gesture), if a second input (e.g., a latter portion of the same gesture) is detected and the second input includes an increase and a subsequent decrease in contact intensity, providing a second animation to represent a transition from the augmented display state to a terminal display state, and subsequently a third animation to represent a transition from the terminal display state back to the augmented display state in accordance with the increase and decrease in contact intensity of the second input, where the second animation is a continuation of the first animation. In this improved method, additional visual feedback is provided after the user interface has entered the augmented display state in response to an initial portion of a gesture, and the additional feedback imparts to the user interface or sub-components thereof a look and feel of some physical characteristic (e.g., elasticity, transparency, size, location, velocity, spin, coefficient of attraction or repulsion to another object, etc.) that changes in response to the continued changes in the intensity of the contact. This continued visual feedback adds visual interest to the user interface and provide a more natural and intuitive response to user input. 
       FIGS. 5A-5I  illustrate example user interfaces for providing visual feedback for a gesture in accordance with changes in intensity of a contact in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6G, and 6H-6M .  FIGS. 5A-5I  include intensity diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to a plurality of intensity thresholds including a predefined intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold “IT L ” or a deep press intensity threshold “IT D ”), a first intensity threshold (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold “IT 0 ”), an intermediate intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold “IT L ”), an end-of-gesture intensity threshold (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold “IT 0 ”), and a squishiness plateau intensity threshold (e.g., a tolerance intensity threshold “IT T ”). 
     In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device with a separate display (e.g., display  450 ) and a separate touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface  451 ). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device  100 , the display is touch-sensitive display system  112  (e.g., a touch screen), and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generators  167  on the touch screen ( FIG. 1A ). For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments described with reference to  FIGS. 5A-5I and 6A-6M  will be discussed with reference to display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451 , while others will be discussed with reference to a touch sensitive display system  112  with built-in tactile output generators to provide both the display and the touch-sensitive surface. However, for embodiments discussed with reference with display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451 , analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112  in response to detecting the contacts described in  FIGS. 5A-5I  on the touch-sensitive display system  112  while displaying the user interfaces shown in  FIGS. 5A-5I  on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . In embodiments where a touch screen  112  replaces display  450  and touch-sensitive surface  451 , the focus selector is, optionally: a respective contact, a representative point corresponding to a contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 , in place of a cursor (e.g., cursor  138 A- 06  or cursor  138 B- 06 ) or a spotlight (e.g., spotlight  138 H- 06 ). Likewise, for embodiments discussed with reference with a touch-sensitive display system  112 , analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts described in  FIGS. 5A-5I  on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in  FIGS. 5A-5I  on the display  450 . In embodiments where a display  450  and touch-sensitive surface  451  replace touch screen  112 , the focus selector is, optionally: a cursor, a magnifying glass, or a spotlight, in place of a respective contact (e.g., contact  138 C- 08 , contact  138 C- 12 , contact  138 C- 16 , contact  138 D- 16 , and any other contact shown in  FIGS. 5A-5I ), a representative point corresponding to a contact, or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . 
     Before more details of specific example user interfaces are provided in  FIGS. 5C-5I , FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 18  and FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 16  provide conceptual illustrations of how visual feedback is provided in response to detected changes in the contact intensity of a gesture. 
     Specifically, in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8 , an example user interface  138 A- 02  goes through a series of changes in response to a first gesture, include displaying an animation showing a series of intermediate display states between an initial display state and an augmented display state of the user interface in accordance with changes in the intensity of the contact. During the first gesture, the intensity of the contact does not exceed a predefined intensity threshold (e.g., “IT L ”) prior to the end of the gesture. As a result, the user interface is returned to its initial display state after the end of the gesture is detected. In FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 17 , the user interface  138 A- 102  responds to an initial portion of a second gesture in largely the same manner as illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8 , e.g., displaying an animation showing a series of intermediate display states between the initial display state and the augmented display state in accordance with changes in the contact intensity of the initial portion of the second gesture. However, in contrast to the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8 , during the second gesture, the intensity of the contact does exceed the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., “IT L ”) before the end of the gesture is detected, as shown in FIG.  5 A 14 . As a result, the user interface enters the augmented display state and remains in the augmented display state after the end of the gesture is detected. FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 9  and FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 18  together illustrate the concept of (1) providing a preview of the effect of an operation that would be performed upon completion of the gesture before the contact intensity of a user input reaches a predefined intensity threshold for committing to the operation is reached, and (2) allowing the user to (i) back out of said effect by ending the gesture before the intensity of the contact reaches the predefined intensity threshold or (ii) to commit to the effect by continuing with the gesture until the contact intensity reaches (or exceeds) the predefined intensity threshold. 
     In FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 16 , an example user interface  138 B- 02  goes through a series of changes in response to a gesture. The changes include (1) displaying a first animation showing a transition from an initial display state to an augmented display state of the user interface in accordance with the intensity of the contact increasing to a predefined intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L ) in FIG.  5 B 4 , (2) displaying a second animation (which is a continuation of the first animation) showing a transition from the augmented display state to a terminal display state of the user interface in accordance with the intensity of the contact increasing beyond the predefined intensity threshold, and (3) displaying a third animation showing the user interface reverting from the terminal display state back to the augmented display state. In some embodiments, the method of providing visual feedback illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 16  is implemented in conjunction with the method illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 19 , and used to provide feedback to a single user input. In some embodiments, the method of providing visual feedback illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 16  and FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 19  are implemented independently of each other, and used to provide feedback to independent gestures. 
     As shown in FIG.  5 A 1 , an example user interface (e.g., user interface  138 A- 02 ) is provided on a display (e.g., display  450 ) of an electronic device having a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface  451  shown in FIG.  5 A 8 ) separate from the display. User interface  138 A- 02  includes various example user interface elements, such as the “Tickle” button  138 A- 04  and various elements figuratively represented by the eyes, nose, mouth, and face of the smiley face shown in user interface  138 A- 02 . For illustrative purposes, visual changes made to the user interface  138 A- 02  in response to a gesture are figuratively shown as visual changes made to the smiley face and/or its components. 
     In FIG.  5 A 1 , user interface  138 A- 02  is in an initial display state S 1  (e.g., a first steady state before any input is detected) showing a calm-looking smiley face. Intensity diagram corresponding to FIG.  5 A 1  indicates that no gesture input has been detected and the intensity of contact is zero. 
     When the device subsequently detects a gesture (e.g., a press input) on the touch-sensitive surface  451 , and a location of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., contact  138 A- 08  shown in FIG.  5 A 8 ) corresponds to a location of the cursor  138 A- 06  over the “Tickle” button  138 A- 04  shown in the user interface  138 A- 02 , the device provides an initial visual feedback (e.g., highlighting the smiley face shown in the user interface  138 A- 02 ) to indicate that the “Tickle” button has gained input focus, as shown in the modified display state S 1 ′ in FIG.  5 A 2 . In some embodiments, the device provides the initial visual feedback when the detected contact intensity reaches above a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (e.g., when the contact is detected on the touch-sensitive surface while the focus selector is over button  138 A- 04 ). In some embodiments, the initial visual feedback is omitted. 
     When the intensity of the contact continues to increase in a range below the light press intensity threshold IT L  (e.g., as indicated by the intensity diagrams in FIGS.  5 A 3 - 5 A 4 ), the device provides a series of intermediate display states (e.g., I-a and I-b) of the user interface  138 A- 102  on the display  450 . Each intermediate display state is, optionally, selected according to a currently detected contact intensity, and represents a transitional state between the initial display state S 1  and an augmented display state S 2  of the user interface. Specifically, if the detected initial portion of the gesture is indicative of an intended operation accomplishable by a completed gesture having the same initial portion, then, the augmented display state is a steady display state of the user interface presented upon the completion of the operation. In this example, a completed operation associated with the “Tickle” button  138 A- 04  will cause the calm-looking smiley face shown in FIG.  5 A 1  to change into a laughing smiley face with a big open mouth (now shown in FIGS.  5 A 14 - 5 A 16 ). As illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 3 - 5 A 4 , increasing contact intensities correspond to increasingly bigger smiles of the smiley face shown on the user interface  138 A- 02 . In some embodiments, the series of intermediate states is provided as a continuous animation. In some embodiments, each intermediate display state between the initial display state and the augmented display state is mapped to a respective contact intensity value between the contact detection intensity threshold (e.g., “IT 0 ”) or zero and the light press intensity threshold IT L . 
     When the intensity of the contact decreases in the range below the light press intensity threshold IT L  (e.g., as indicated by the intensity diagrams in FIGS.  5 A 4 - 5 A 6 ), the device provides a series of intermediate display states (e.g., I-c) of the user interface  138 A- 102  on the display  450  showing the transition back toward the initial display state S 1 . Again, each intermediate display state is selected according to a currently detected contact intensity, and represents a transitional state between the augmented display state S 2  and the initial display state S 1  of the user interface. In this example, as illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 4 - 5 A 5 , decreasing contact intensities correspond to increasingly smaller smiles of the smiley face shown on the user interface  138 A- 02 . 
     In the example shown in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8 , the intensity of the contact never exceeds the light press intensity threshold IT L  required for invoking the augmented display state S 2 . Therefore, when the end of the gesture is detected (e.g., when the contact intensity drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 ), the device does not display the augmented display state S 2 , and returns the user interface  138 A- 02  to its initial display state S 1  after displaying the one or more intermediate display states. As shown in FIG.  5 A 6 , after the intensity of contact  138 A- 08  drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , the end-of-gesture is detected, and the user interface  138 A- 02  is returned to the initial display state S 1 . After the contact is removed completely (as shown in FIG.  5 A 8 ), the user interface  138 A- 02  remains in the initial display state S 1 . 
     FIG.  5 A 9  is a diagram showing how changes in the display states of the user interface  138 A- 02  correspond to changes in the intensity of the contact  138 A- 08 . A solid curve  138 A- 10  represents the changes in the contact intensity of a detected gesture (e.g., contact  138 A- 08 ) over time, and the seven particular values marked by respective small circles on the solid curve  138 A- 10  correspond to the intensity values shown in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 7 , respectively. Corresponding display states (e.g., S 1 , S 1 ′, I-a, I-b, and I-c) for the particular values, and an animation A 1  showing the transition between display states are also indicated in the diagram. A dotted curve  138 A- 14  represents the changes in the contact intensity of a different gesture, which will cause a different outcome (as will be shown in FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 18 ). 
     FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 9  illustrate an example scenario in which a user started a gesture with an initial contact followed by a press input with intensity below IT L . In response to the initial contact and press input with intensity below IT L , a preview of the effect of a completed light press input (e.g., as a natural progression of the press input to the light press intensity threshold IT L ) is provided to the user. The preview is in the form of one or more intermediate display states between an initial display state of the user interface and an augmented display state evocable by a gesture containing a light press input. In this example scenario, the user, having seen the preview of the effect of the completed light press, terminated the gesture before the intensity of the contact reached the light press intensity threshold IT L . As a result, the user interface is returned to the initial display state without entering the second display state. Correspondingly, the operation initiated by the gesture is reverted before completion. 
     FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 18  illustrate a scenario alternative to that shown in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 9 . In the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 18 , a user started a gesture with an initial contact followed by a press input with intensity below IT L . In response to the initial contact and press input with intensity below IT L , a preview of the effect of a completed light press is provided to the user. In contrast to the previous scenario, here, the user, having seen the preview, continued to increase the intensity of the contact and did not terminate the gesture until the intensity of the contact had reached beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L  (e.g., provided the light press input). As a result, the user interface  138 A- 02  enters the augmented display state and remains in the augmented display state after the gesture has been terminated. Correspondingly, the operation initiated by the gesture is completed. 
     In FIG.  5 A 10 , the same user interface  138 A- 02  and user interface elements are shown in the initial display state S 1  on the display  450 , and the corresponding intensity diagram indicates that no gesture has been detected on the touch-sensitive surface  451 . 
     When the device subsequently detects a gesture (e.g., a press input) on the touch-sensitive surface  451 , and a location of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., contact  138 A- 12  shown in FIG.  5 A 17 ) corresponds to a location of the cursor  138 A- 06  over the “Tickle” button  138 A- 04  shown in the user interface  138 A- 02 , the device provides an initial visual feedback (e.g., highlighting the smiley face shown in the user interface  138 A- 02 ) to indicate that the “Tickle” button has gained input focus, as shown in the modified display state S 1 ′ in FIG.  5 A 11 . 
     When the user continues to increase the intensity of the contact  138 A- 12  in a range below the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device provides one or more intermediate states (e.g., I-a and I-b) of the user interface  138 A- 02  on the display  450 , in the same manner as shown previously in FIGS.  5 A 3 - 5 A 4 . For example, as illustrated by FIGS.  5 A 12  and  5 A 13 , the devices shows bigger and bigger smiles on the smiley face in the user interface  138 A- 02  in response to the increasing contact intensity in a range below IT L . When the intensity of the contact  138 A- 012  finally reaches an intensity at or above the light press intensity threshold IT L  (as shown in FIG.  5 A 14 ), the user interface  138 A- 02  enters the augmented display state S 2  showing the smiley with a big open mount laugh. 
     In this example, since the intensity of the contact  138 A- 12  does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end of the gesture is detected by the device, the user interface  138 A- 02  not only enters, but also remains in the augmented display state when the intensity of the contact  138 A- 12  subsequently drops below the light press intensity threshold IT L  again. Thus, in some embodiments, the augmented display state S 2  is a second steady state of the user interface  138 A- 02 , distinct from the initial display state (e.g., the first steady state) of the user interface  138 A- 02 . 
     As shown in FIG.  5 A 15 , when the intensity of the contact  138 A- 12  is reduced to the end-of-gesture intensity threshold (e.g., the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  or some other intensity threshold value), the user interface  138 A- 102  does not exit the augmented display state S 2  and does not return to the initial display state S 1 . Similarly, after the gesture is terminated and the intensity of contact  138 A- 12  becomes zero, the user interface  138 A- 02  remains in the augmented display state S 2 , as shown in FIG.  5 A 16 . 
     FIG.  5 A 18  is a diagram showing how changes in the display states of the user interface  138 A- 02  correspond to changes in the intensity of the contact  138 A- 12 . A solid curve  138 A- 14  represents the changes in the contact intensity of a detected gesture (e.g., contact  138 A- 12 ), and the seven particular values marked by respective small circles on the solid curve  138 A- 14  correspond to the intensity values shown in FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 16 , respectively. Corresponding display states (e.g., S 1 , S 1 ′, I-a, I-b, and S 2 ) for the particular values, and an animation A 1 ′ showing the transition between display states are also indicated in the diagram. 
     FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 18  illustrate an example scenario in which a user started a gesture with an initial contact followed by a press input with intensity below IT L . In response to the initial contact and the press input with intensity below IT L , a preview of the effect of a the completed light press (e.g., as a natural progression of the press input with intensity below IT L  to the light press intensity threshold IT L ) is provided to the user. The preview is in the form of one or more intermediate display states between an initial display state of the user interface and an augmented display state evocable by a gesture containing the light press. In this example scenario, the user, having seen the preview of the effect of the light press, continued with the gesture and increased the intensity of the contact to the light press intensity threshold IT L  (e.g., provided the light press input) before terminating the gesture. As a result, the user interface enters into the augmented display state (e.g., the second steady state of the user interface  138 A- 02 ). Correspondingly, the operation initiated by the gesture is completed. 
     Although the contact intensities of the respective gestures shown in FIGS.  5 A 9  and  5 A 18  each have only a single local maximum, such is not required. In some embodiments, the contact intensity of a gesture will, in some circumstances, oscillate in the range between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L . In response to such an oscillating input, the device selects intermediate display states of the user interface  138 A- 02  in accordance with the magnitude of the currently detected contact intensity, and the animation presented on the display either goes in a first direction approaching the augmented display state S 2  or in a second direction approaching the initial display state S 1  depending on whether the currently detected intensity is increasing or decreasing. 
     FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 18  do not show the display states of the user interface  138 A- 02  when the intensity of the contact is above the light press intensity threshold IT L . In some embodiments, the user interface remains in the augmented display state S 2  during the time that the intensity of the contact is above the light press intensity threshold IT L . In some embodiments, additional display states (e.g., additional steady display states and/or squishiness display states to be discussed later) are presented in accordance with the contact intensity in the range above the light press intensity threshold IT L . While the examples illustrated above with reference to FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 18  have been described with respect to the light press intensity threshold IT L , in some embodiments, analogous operations are performed with respect to the deep press intensity threshold IT D  (e.g., operations performed in response to detecting a deep press input including a contact with an intensity that is above IT D ). 
     FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 16  illustrate how a device provides additional visual feedback in response to continued changes (e.g., increases and decreases) of the contact intensity in a range above the light press intensity threshold IT L , after the user interface has entered the augmented display state S 2  from the initial display state S 1  in response to the intensity of the contact having reached the light press intensity threshold IT L . Sometimes, the additional visual feedback includes additional display states of the user interface that are intermediate display states between the augmented display state S 2  and a non-steady display state (e.g., S 3 ) distinct from the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2 . In some embodiments, the device selects each of the additional display state based on the currently detected contact intensity between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the presents the additional display states in an animation that is a continuation of the animation used to show the transition from the initial display state S 1  to the augmented display state S 2 . Sometimes, the detected contact intensity will, in some circumstances, oscillate in a range above the light press intensity threshold IT L , and the device shows changes in the user interface in accordance with the oscillating contact intensity in a manner resembling a degree of “squishiness” of the user interface (as used herein, the term “squishiness” refers to the response of a user interface object or user interface to changes in intensity of a contact that mimic, simulate, or are evocative of the compression or decompression of an elastic physical object subjected to corresponding changes in pressure). Therefore, the additional display states of the user interface are sometimes referred to as the “squishiness display states” of the user interface. In some embodiments, the squishiness display states provides the user interface and/or one or more user interface elements thereof the appearance of possessing a physical property (e.g., size, shape, location, weight, elasticity, opacity, transparency, spring constant, velocity, spin, coefficient of attraction or repulsion, etc.) that responds to the changes in the contact intensity. 
     As shown in FIG.  5 B 1 , an example user interface  138 B- 02  is provided on a display  450  of an electronic device having a touch-sensitive surface  451  (shown in FIG.  5 B 15 ) separate from the display  450 . The user interface  138 B- 02  includes various example user interface elements, such as a “Tickle” button  138 B- 04  and various elements (e.g., buttons, objects, icons, windows, etc.) figuratively represented by the eyes, nose, mouth, and face of the smiley face show in user interface  138 B- 02 . For illustrative purposes, the various kinds of visual changes made to the components of the smiley face in response to a gesture represent the various kinds of visual changes made to objects in an example user interface in response to the gesture. 
     FIGS.  5 B 1 , the user interface  138 B- 02  is in an initial display state S 1  showing a calm-looking smiley face. Intensity diagram corresponding to FIG.  5 B 1  indicates that no gesture input has been detected and the intensity of contact is zero. 
     FIGS.  5 B 2 - 5 B 4  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the device subsequently detects a gesture (e.g., a press input) on the touch-sensitive surface  451  shown in FIG.  5 B 15 , and a location of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., contact  138 B- 08  shown in FIG.  5 B 15 ) corresponds to a location of the cursor  138 B- 06  over the “Tickle” button  138 B- 04  shown in the user interface  138 B- 02 , the device provides a series of feedbacks in response to a first portion of the gesture. In the first portion of the gesture, the intensity of the contact  138 B- 08  gradually increases from the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  to the light press intensity threshold IT L , and in response, the device provides an animation including a series of intermediate display states (e.g., display state I-a shown in FIG.  5 B 3 ) between the initial display state S 1  (e.g., FIG.  5 B 1  showing a calm-looking smiley face) and the augmented display state S 2  (e.g., FIG.  5 B 4  showing a laughing smiley face with a big open mouth). The device determines the rate of change in the animation from the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2  in accordance with the intensity of the contact  138 B- 08  in the initial portion of the gesture. The initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2  are both steady display states that the user interface  138 B- 02  is operable to maintain when no gesture is detected on the touch-sensitive surface  451 . 
     As shown in FIGS.  5 B 5 - 5 B 6 , once the user interface has entered the augmented display state S 2 , if the intensity of the contact continues to increase above the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays one or more additional display states (e.g., display states I-b and I-c) of the user interface  138 B- 02 . Each of the one or more additional display states corresponds to a respective current value of the contact intensity. In some embodiments, as the contact intensity increase from a value below the light press intensity threshold IT L  to a value above the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device provides the additional display states in a second animation that is a continuation of the first animation showing the transition from the initial display state S 1  to the augmented display state S 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the second animation simulates some physical properties. As illustrated in this example, various physical properties of the objects in the user interface  138 B- 02  (e.g., the size of the smiley&#39;s face and mouth, the shape of the smiley&#39;s eyes, the color or opacity of the smiley&#39;s face, the length and elasticity of the smiley&#39;s tongue, etc.) change (e.g., increase and/or decrease) in response to the changes (e.g., increases) in the intensity of the contact beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L . In addition, objects are, optionally, added or removed from the user interface  138 B- 02  (e.g., as illustrated by the addition of the smiley&#39;s tongue and the removal of the smiley&#39;s nose in FIGS.  5 B 5  and  5 B 6 ) in response to the changes (e.g., increases) in the intensity of the contact beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L . 
     In contrast to the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2 , the squishiness display states (e.g., I-b and I-c) shown in FIGS.  5 B 5  and  5 B 6  are non-steady display states. Thus, in some embodiments, the user interface  138 B- 02  is not operable to maintain these squishiness display states when the intensity of the contact is not maintained at a current level. For example, if the intensity of the contact had dropped below the light press intensity threshold IT L  at this point, the user interface  138 B- 02  will not stay in the intermediate state I-c, but rather returns to the augmented display state S 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the device implements a tolerance intensity threshold IT T  such that contact intensity reaching above the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  does not cause additional changes to the user interface. The tolerance intensity threshold IT T  serves to discourage the user from pressing on the touch-sensitive surface  451  with too much force so as to cause fatigue and damage to the touch-sensitive surface  451 . As shown in FIG.  5 B 7 - 5 B 8 , when the intensity of the contact has reached (as shown in FIG.  5 B 7 ) and subsequently exceeded (as shown in FIG.  5 B 8 ) the tolerance intensity threshold IT T , the user interface  138 B- 02  reaches and remains in a terminal display state S 3  (sometimes also referred to as the “squishiness plateau state”). As shown in FIG.  5 B 8 , any continued increase in the contact intensity beyond the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  causes no further visual feedback in the display  450 . 
     When the contact intensity drops below the tolerance intensity threshold again, the user interface  138 B- 02  responds to the changes in contact intensity again. As shown in FIGS.  5 B 9 - 5 B  10 , in response to the intensity of the contact decreasing in the range between the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  and the light press intensity threshold IT L , squishiness display states beyond the augmented display state are once again provided. The device selects each squishiness state in accordance with the currently detected contact intensity. In some embodiments, the rate of change in the animation presenting the squishiness states corresponds to the rate of change in the contact intensity. 
     When the intensity of the contact drops to the light press intensity threshold IT L  from a value above IT L  (as shown in FIG.  5 B 11 ), the device redisplays the augmented display state S 2  of the user interface  138 B- 02  on the display  450 . When the contact intensity is reduced to the end-of-gesture intensity threshold (e.g., the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  or some other intensity threshold value), the user interface  138 B- 02  remains in the augmented display state S 2 , as shown in FIG.  5 B 13 . Similarly, after the gesture is terminated and the intensity of contact  138 B- 08  becomes zero, the user interface  138 B- 02  remains in the augmented display state S 2 , as shown in FIG.  5 A 14 . 
     FIG.  5 B 16  is a diagram showing how changes in the display states of the user interface  138 B- 02  correspond to changes in the intensity of the contact  138 B- 08 . A solid curve  138 B- 10  represents the changes in the contact intensity of a detected gesture (e.g., the gesture providing the contact  138 A- 08 ), and the fourteen particular values marked by respective small circles on the solid curve  138 B- 10  correspond to the intensity values shown in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 14 , respectively. Corresponding display states (e.g., S 1 , S 1 ′, I-a, S 2 , I-b, I-c, and S 3 ) for the particular values, and animations A 1  showing the transition from display state S 1  to S 2 , A 2  showing the transition from display state S 2  to S 3 , and A 2 ′ showing the transition from display state S 3  to S 2  are also indicated in the diagram. 
     Although FIGS.  5 B 1 - 16  illustrate the transition from the initial display state to the augmented display state, and the provision of the squishiness display states in response to different portions of a single gesture (e.g., a gesture providing a continuous contact with the touch sensitive surface  451 ), such is not required. In some embodiments, the transition from the initial display state to the augmented display state is, optionally, accomplished in response to a first gesture, and the squishiness display states are provided in response to a second gesture while the user interface is in the augmented display state. While the examples illustrated above with reference to FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 16  have been described with respect to the light press intensity threshold IT L , in some embodiments, analogous operations are performed with respect to the deep press intensity threshold IT D  (e.g., operations performed in response to detecting a deep press input including a contact with an intensity that is above IT D ). 
       FIGS. 5A and 5B  provide an overview of how feedback is, optionally, provided in response to a gesture in accordance with various embodiments.  FIGS. 5C-5H  provides particular example embodiments that implements the methods described with reference to  FIGS. 5A and 5B , and various augmentations of these methods. 
     FIGS.  5 C 1  through  5 C 32  illustrate example visual feedback provided in response to changes in contact intensity of a gesture when the gesture is directed to a menu button in an exemplar user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described in this specification, including the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6M . 
     FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 8  illustrate the visual feedback provided in response to a gesture whose contact intensity does not ever exceeds the light press intensity threshold IT L . FIGS.  5 C 9 - 5 C 16  illustrate the visual feedback provided in response to another gesture whose contact intensity does exceed the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end of the gesture is detected. The contrast between the feedbacks shown in FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 8  and FIGS.  5 C 9 - 5 C 16  illustrate how a user is enabled to use a gesture to cause a preview of an augmented display state to be presented without committing to the augmented display state, and alternatively, how to cause the preview of the augmented display state to be present and eventually commit to the augmented display state. 
     FIG.  5 C 1  illustrates an example user interface (e.g., window  138 C- 02 ) having a selectable user interface element (e.g., “Tools” button  138 C- 04  in a menu bar of the window  138 C- 02 ). The “Tools” button  138 C- 04  is associated with an operation for opening a respective drop-down menu (e.g., a “Tools” menu) when selected or clicked on in a user interface  138 C- 04 . For illustrative purposes, the window  138 C- 02  is displayed on a touch screen  112  of a device. Before any touch input is received (e.g., as indicated by the intensity diagram shown in FIG.  5 C 1 ), the window  138 C- 02  is in an initial display state showing all the buttons (including the “Tools” button  138 C- 04 ) in the menu bar in an unselected state. 
     FIG.  5 C 2  illustrates that, when a gesture is detected (e.g., the contact  138 C- 08  of the gesture has an intensity above the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 ) and the contact  138 C- 08  of the gesture is over the “Tools” button  138 C- 04 , the device modifies the appearance of the window  138 C- 02  to indicate selection of the “Tools” button  138 C- 04 . For example, the “Tools” button  138 C- 04  changes from an un-highlighted state (shown in FIG.  5 C 1 ) to a highlighted state (shown in FIG.  5 C 2 ), indicating the selection of Tools button  138 - 104  caused by the contact of the gesture. 
     FIGS.  5 C 3 - 5 C 5  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact continues to change (e.g., increase and then decrease) in a range below the light press intensity threshold IT L  after the initial contact was detected, the device provides an animation on the touch screen  112  in response to the changes in the contact intensity. The animation includes a series of intermediate display states (e.g., I-a, I-b) showing gradual expansion (e.g., revealing more and more menu items) of a drop-down menu  138 C- 06  associated with the “Tools” button  138 C- 04  when the intensity of the contact gradually increases toward the light press intensity threshold IT L . The animation also includes a series of intermediate display states (e.g., I-b, I-c) showing gradual retraction (e.g., revealing fewer and fewer menu items) of the partially expanded drop-down menu  138 C- 06  when the intensity of the contact gradually decreases toward the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 . In some embodiments, the device determines how much of the drop-down menu is revealed based on the difference between the currently detected contact intensity and the light press intensity threshold IT L . In some embodiments, the current rate of change in the animation is based on the current rate of change in the intensity of the contact. In some embodiments, the menu only approaches being fully expanded (e.g., showing all of its menu items that would have been shown when the “Tools” button was selected or clicked on in another interface) when the intensity of the contact approaches the light press intensity threshold IT L . In some embodiments, before the contact intensity reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the text portion of all the menu items in the drop-down menu  138 C- 06  is revealed (even though the drop-down menu itself is not completely expanded), such that the user can see all the menu items before deciding whether to continue the gesture to open the drop-down menu completely. 
     FIG.  5 C 6  illustrates that, when the intensity of the contact drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  before ever reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L , the window  138 C- 02  is returned to the initial display state S 1 , in which the drop-down menu  138 C- 06  is completely closed, and the “Tools” button is no longer highlighted. In the end, as shown in FIG.  5 C 7 , when the contact intensity drops to zero, the window  138 C- 02  remains in the initial display state S 1 . 
     In the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 7 , a user pressed on the “Tools” button  138 C- 04  in the window  138 C- 02  with an intensity below IT L , was shown a preview of the effect of a continued press (e.g., some or all of the menu items under the selected menu button), and released the “Tools” button  138 C- 04  without actually pressing hard enough (e.g., with an intensity above IT L ) to complete the operation for opening the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 . 
     FIG.  5 C 8  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 C- 08  (as indicated by the solid line  138 C- 10 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the unselected menu buttons. S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the “Tools” button in the user interface. I-a, I-b, and I-c are representatives of a series of intermediate display states between the initial display state S 1  and an augmented display state (not reached in FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 7 ) shown during an animation A 1 . 
     FIGS.  5 C 9 - 5 C 12  illustrate the same visual feedback for an initial portion of a gesture containing a press input with an intensity below the light press intensity threshold IT L . In FIG.  5 C 9 , no gesture has been detected, and the window  138 C- 02  is in its initial display state S 1 . When the intensity of the contact  138 C- 12  reaches the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , the device displays the window  138 C- 02  in a modified display state S 1 ′ (as shown in FIG.  5 C 10 ) to indicate the selection of the “Tools” button  138 C- 04 . In FIGS.  5 C 11 - 5 C 12 , when the contact intensity continues to increase in a range below the light press intensity threshold IT L , the drop-down menu  138 C- 06  gradually expands to reveal more menu items in response to the increases in the intensity of the contact. 
     FIG.  5 C 13  shows that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact finally reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the drop-down menu  138 C- 06  is fully expanded, and the window  138 C- 02  is in the augmented display state S 2 . In some embodiments, the augmented display state S 2  shows the drop-down menu in a fully expanded state showing all available menu items in the “Tools” menu. In some embodiments, the augmented display state S 2  shows a selected subset (e.g., a set of favorite menu items, a set of most frequently used menu items, a set of first-level menu items, etc.) of all available menu items. In some embodiments, if only a subset of all available menu items are shown in the augmented displays state S 2 , a user can press anywhere or on a particular menu item in the expanded drop-down-menu to reveal some or all of the other menu items not currently shown in the expanded drop-down menu  138 C- 06 . The augmented display state S 2  is a steady open state for the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 . In some embodiments, the device provides additional feedback to indicate that the contact intensity has reached the light press intensity threshold IT L . For example, in some embodiments, the browser window will flicker, the drop-down menu will change color or opacity briefly, the animation will pause briefly, the device will provide an audio signal, or the device will provide a haptic feedback on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the touch screen  112 ), when the intensity of the contact first reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L . 
     FIGS.  5 C 14 - 5 C 15  illustrate that, in some embodiments, after the intensity of the contact has reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , the window  138 C- 02  will not return to the initial display state S 1  and will remain in the augmented display state S 2  when the contact intensity drops below the light press intensity threshold IT L , and eventually below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  or zero. 
     In the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 C 9 - 5 C 15 , a user pressed on the “Tools” button  138 C- 04  with an intensity below IT L , and as the user continually increased the contact intensity of the press input, the device provides a preview of the effect of a continued press input. When the user continued to increase the contact intensity to and beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L , the user completes the operation of displaying the drop-down menu  138 C- 06  in a steady open state. Once the drop-down menu entered the steady open state, it does not close again in response to the user terminating the contact. The user can subsequently use other input (e.g., a tap input or a light press input with an intensity above IT L ) to select individual items shown within the drop-down menu (e.g., if the focus selector is over one of the individual items) or to close the drop-down menu (e.g., if the focus selector is over “Tools” button  138 C- 04 ). 
     FIG.  5 C 16  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 C- 12  (as indicated by the solid line  138 C- 14 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the window  138 C- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state of the window  138 C- 02 . S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the Tools button  138 C- 04  in the window  138 C- 02 . I-a and I-b are representatives of a series of intermediate display states between the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2 . After the window  138 C- 02  enters the augmented display state S 2  showing the drop-down menu  138 C- 06  in a steady open state, the window  138 C- 02  remains in the augmented display state S 2  regardless of the subsequent decrease of the contact intensity. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a subsequent increase in intensity of contact  138 C- 12  above IT L  followed by liftoff of contact  138 C- 12 , the device ceases to display the augmented display state S 2  and redisplays the initial display state S 1 . Additionally, in some embodiments, analogous operations are displayed with the deep press intensity threshold IT D  taking the place of the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  taking the place of the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (e.g., the initial display state is displayed until contact reaches intensity at IT L  and the augmented display state S 2  is displayed when contact reaches an intensity at IT D ). 
     FIGS.  5 C 17 - 5 C 32  illustrate the visual feedback provided in response to the changes in the intensity of the contact relative to multiple intensity thresholds (e.g., IT L , IT D  and/or IT T ), in accordance to some embodiments. In these figures, the light press intensity threshold IT L  is an intensity threshold for entering a first augmented display state S 2 , the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is an intensity threshold for entering a second augmented display state S 3 , and the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  is an intensity threshold for reaching a non-steady terminal display state S 4  of the user interface. 
     In FIGS.  5 C 17 - 5 C 32 , the example user interface is a window  138 C- 02 ′ containing a menu bar. The example user interface element invoked by a gesture is a “Tools” button  138 C- 04 ′ in the menu bar. The gesture has a contact  138 C- 16  over the “Tools” button  138 C- 04 ′ as shown in FIG.  5 C 18 . 
     The window  138 C- 02 ′ shown in FIGS.  5 C 17 - 5 C 32  behaves in the same manner as the window  138 C- 02  shown in FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 7 , when the intensity of the contact does not exceed the light press intensity threshold IT L . Thus, in some embodiments, if the intensity of the contact never reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the window  138 C- 02 ′ eventually returns to the initial display state S 1  after the end of gesture is detected. 
     FIG.  5 C 17 - 5 C 32  illustrate a scenario where the intensity of the contact reaches and goes beyond multiple intensity thresholds, including the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIGS.  5 C 18 - 5 C 19 ), the light press intensity threshold IT L  (as shown in FIGS.  5 C 20  and  5 C 22 ), the deep press intensity threshold IT D  (as shown in FIGS.  5 C 24 - 5 C 25 ), and the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  (as shown in FIGS.  5 C 26 - 5 C 27 ). As shown in the intensity diagrams of FIGS.  5 C 17 - 5 C 31 , the magnitudes of IT 0 , IT L , IT D , and IT T  increase monotonically in sequence. 
     FIGS.  5 C 17 - 5 C 18  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when a gesture is detected and the intensity of the contact increases from zero to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , the user interface  138 C- 02 ′ changes from the initial display state S 1  (e.g., “Tools” button  138 C- 04 ′ being un-highlighted in FIG.  5 C 17 ) to the modified initial display state S 1 ′ (e.g., “Tools” button  138 C- 04 ′ being highlighted to indicate its selection in FIG.  5 C 18 ). 
     FIGS.  5 C 19 - 5 C 20  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the contact intensity continues to increase from the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  to the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays an animation showing the window  138 C- 02 ′ going through a series of intermediate display states (e.g., the “Tools” menu  138 C- 06 ′ gradually expanding with the increasing contact intensity, as shown in FIG.  5 C 19 ), and ultimately arriving at a first augmented display state S 2  (as shown in FIG.  5 C 20 ). In the first augmented display state S 2 , the “Tools” menu  138 C- 06 ′ is in a first steady open state showing a first subset (e.g., a set of most frequently used menu items, a set of favorite menu items, a set of first-level menu items, etc.) of all available menu items of the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′. 
     FIG.  5 C 21  illustrates that, when the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increases or decreases) in a range below the light press intensity threshold IT L  after having reached the light press intensity threshold IT L  previously (e.g., shown in FIG.  5 C 20 ), the window  138 C- 02 ′ will not return to the previously displayed intermediate display states (e.g., I-a) or the initial display state S 1 . Instead, the window  138 C- 02  remains in the first augmented display state S 2 , showing the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′ in its first steady open state (containing a first subset of all available menu items under the Tools menu). 
     FIGS.  5 C 22 - 5 C 23  illustrate that, in some embodiments, once the window  138 C- 02 ′ has reached the first augmented display state S 2  (as shown in FIG.  5 C 20 ), when the intensity of the contact continue to change (e.g., increase) in a range between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the deep press intensity threshold IT D , additional intermediate display states between the first augmented display state S 2  and a second augmented display state S 3  are shown as an animation. In some embodiments, the additional intermediate display states shows a preview of the second augmented display state S 3 . In this particular example, the second augmented display state S 3  is shown in FIG.  5 C 24 , and is a second steady open state of the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′. In the second open steady state, the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′ displays a second subset of menu items (e.g., the previously un-displayed menu items under the “Tools” menu, or a set of second-level menu items) in addition to the first subset of menu items previously displayed in the first steady open state of the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′. As shown in FIG.  5 C 23 , as the intensity of the contact gradually increases in the range between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the device provides additional intermediate display state of the window  138 C- 02 ′ in accordance with the currently detected contact intensity. The additional intermediate display states (e.g., I-c) show the gradual further expansion of the drop-down menu to reveal more and more of the second subset of menu items in addition to the first subset of menu items previously shown. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG.  5 C 23 , the second subset of menu items are shown in a different color or shade from the first subset of menu items (e.g., so as to indicate that the second subset of menu items are newly displayed items that were previously hidden). In some embodiments, as shown in FIG.  5 C 22 , the intermediate display states between the first augmented display state S 2  and the second augmented display state S 3  shows gradual magnification of the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′ in response to the increasing contact intensity above IT L . In some embodiments, the second augmented display state S 3  is merely a steady magnified version of the first augmented display state S 2 . 
     As shown in FIG.  5 C 24 , when the intensity of the contact reaches the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′ is further expanded to fully reveal the second subset of menu items in addition to the first subset of menu items under the “Tools” menu. Once the window  138 C- 02 ′ has entered the second augmented display state S 3 , if the intensity of the contact drops below the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the window  138 C- 02 ′ will remain in the second augmented display state S 3  shown in FIG.  5 C 24 . 
     In some embodiments, when the window  138 C- 02 ′ enters a steady display state (e.g., the first augmented display state S 2  and/or the second augmented display state S 3 ), the device provides an additional feedback (visual, audio, and/or haptic) to indicate that the intensity of the contact has just crossed a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ) for completing a respective operation associated with the user interface element (e.g., the “Tools” button  138 C- 04 ′) under the contact  138 C- 16 . In some embodiments, the visual feedback is a flicker of the user interface or the drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′, a change in color, hue, or transparency of the drop-down menu, a discontinuity in the animation leading to and beyond the newly reached steady display state, etc. 
     In some embodiments, one additional level of feedback to an even higher level of contact intensity is implemented. This additional level of feedback involves displaying one or more “squishiness” display states, when the contact intensity reaches above the deep press intensity threshold IT D . “Squishiness” display states are extensions of the last steady display state (e.g., the second augmented display state S 3 ) of the user interface, and corresponds to the magnitudes of the currently detected contact intensity. In general, squishiness display states provides the user interface element that is being manipulated by the gesture with an appearance of a physical property (e.g., size, shape, elasticity, location, distance, coefficient of attraction or repulsion etc.) that changes in response to the changes in the contact intensity. 
     As shown in FIG.  5 C 25 , when the intensity of the contact continues to increase above the deep press intensity threshold IT D  after the user interface  138 C- 02 ′ has reached the second augmented display state S 3 , the fully expanded “Tool” menu  138 C- 06 ′ expands further in size in response to the increased contact intensity above IT D . In some embodiments, the rate of expansion relative to the rate of increase in contact intensity is smaller as compared to the rate of change from S 1  to S 2  and from S 2  to S 3  relative to the increase in contact intensity. In some embodiments, the animation showing the changes in size in response to the changes in contact intensity in this range (e.g., from IT D  to IT T ) is a continuation of the earlier animation showing the changes in the window  138 C- 02 ′ in response to the changes in contact intensity in the range from the light press intensity threshold IT L  to the deep press intensity threshold IT D . 
     In some embodiments, when the contact intensity oscillates in a predetermined range above the deep press intensity threshold IT D , e.g., a range between the deep press intensity threshold IT D  and a tolerance intensity threshold IT T , the size of the fully expanded drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′ oscillates synchronously with the oscillating contact intensity. In some embodiments, this change in size (sometimes, along with some other visual effects) affords the menu  138 C- 06 ′ an appearance of being made of some flexible material (e.g., rubber) that is stretched or pressed by a force of oscillating magnitude. 
     FIGS.  5 C 26 - 5 C 27  illustrate that a tolerance intensity threshold IT T  is implemented in accordance with some embodiments, and no further visual feedback is provided in the window  138 C- 02 ′ when the intensity of the contact increases beyond the tolerance intensity threshold IT T . The display state shown in FIGS.  5 C 26  and  5 C 27  are non-steady terminal display state S 4  of the window  138 C- 02 ′. As shown in FIGS.  5 C 26 - 5 C 27 , when the contact intensity increases in the range between the deep press intensity threshold IT D  and the tolerance intensity threshold IT T , the size of the fully expanded menu  138 C- 06 ′ has been increased to a maximum level, further increases of the contact intensity beyond the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  causes no further changes in the window  138 C- 02 ′. 
     In some embodiments, when the contact intensity subsequently drops below the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  and continues to decrease in a range between the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  and the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the device will display an animation including squishiness display states that show the transition from the terminal display state S 4  to the second augmented display state S 2 . 
     FIGS.  5 C 28 - 5 C 31  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact subsequently drops from a value above the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  to various values below the tolerance intensity threshold IT T , e.g., below the deep press intensity threshold IT D  (as shown in FIG.  5 C 28 ), below the light press intensity threshold IT L  (as shown in FIG.  5 C 29 ), below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 C 30 ), and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 C 31 ), the window  138 C- 102  re-enters the last steady display state S 3  (e.g., the second augmented display state showing the fully expanded Tools menu  138 C- 06 ′), and then remains in the last steady display state S 3 . 
     FIG.  5 C 32  is a diagram illustrating the changes in intensity of the contact  138 C- 16  (as indicated by the solid line  138 C- 18 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the window  138 C- 02 ′ over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the unselected “Tools” menu button  138 C- 04 ′, S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the “Tools” menu button  138 C- 04 ′, and I-a represents an intermediate display state between the initial display state S 1  and a first augmented display state S 2 , showing expansion of the menu  138 C- 06 ′ to a first steady open state. An animation A 1  is presented to show the transitions between the initial display state S 1  and the first augmented display state S 2 . I-b and I-c are additional intermediate display states between the first augmented display state S 2  and a second augmented display state S 3 , showing expansion of the menu  138 C- 06 ′ to a second steady open state. Animations A 2  and A 3  are used to present the intermediate display states between the first augmented display state S 2  and the second augmented display state S 3 . Animations A 2  and A 3  are each a continuation of the animation A 1 . S 4  is a non-steady display state showing the terminal squishiness state. I-d is a squishiness display state between the second augmented display state S 3  and the terminal squishiness display state S 4 . An animation A 4  is used to present the squishiness display states between the second augmented display state S 3  and the plateau display state S 4 . Animation A 4  is a continuation of the animation A 3 . Not all animations are indicated in the diagram. 
     FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 42  illustrate how a device transforms a user interface (e.g., example user interfaces  138 D- 02 ,  138 D- 02 ′, or  138 D- 02 ″) from a first configuration to a second configuration in response to a gesture. In these figures, the first configuration shows an object (e.g., object  138 D- 04   a ,  138 D- 04 ′ or  138 D- 04 ″) in a grid view, and the second configuration shows the object in a different view (e.g., as a pop-up window, as the central component in a cover-flow view, or as a reversed view showing additional information about the object). In the description of these figures, the first configuration is an initial display state S 1  of the user interface. The second configuration is an augmented display state S 2  of the user interface. In some of the figures, an additional augmented state S 3  and squishiness display states are also presented. The example user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described in this specification, including the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6M . 
     The following is a breakdown of the four different categories of embodiments illustrated in FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 42 : 
     (1) In FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 8  illustrate the visual feedback provided in a user interface in response to a gesture whose contact intensity never exceeded the light press intensity threshold IT L . FIGS.  5 D 9 - 5 D 16  illustrate the visual feedback provided in the same user interface in response to another gesture whose contact intensity does exceed the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end-of-gesture is detected. In FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 16 , the example user interface  138 D- 02  in the first configuration shows objects  138 D- 04   a  through  138 D- 04   d  (e.g., icons or thumbnails representing images, albums, playlists, or other documents or objects) in a grid view (as shown in FIGS.  5 D 1  and  5 D 9 ). The example user interface  138 D- 02  in the second configuration shows a selected object  138 D- 04   a  in an edit view (e.g., in a pop-up window). FIGS.  5 D 17 - 5 D 24  illustrate an alternative embodiment to that shown in FIGS.  5 D 9 - 5 D 16 . 
     (2) In FIGS.  5 D 17 - 5 D 24 , the example user interface  138 D- 02 ′ in the first configuration shows objects  138 D- 04   a ′ through  138 D- 04   d ′ (e.g., icons or thumbnails representing images, albums, playlists, or other documents or objects) in a grid view (as shown in FIG.  5 D 7 ). The example user interface  138 D- 02 ′ in the second configuration shows a selected object  138 D- 04 ′ (or a transformed version thereof) as a central component in a cover-flow view. 
     (3) In FIGS.  5 D 25 - 5 D 32 , the example user interface  138 D- 02 ″ in the first configuration shows objects  138 D- 04   a ″ through  138 D- 04   d ″ (e.g., icons or thumbnails representing images, albums, playlists, or other documents or objects) in a grid view (as shown in FIG.  5 D 17 ). The example user interface  138 D- 02 ″ in the second configuration shows a selected object  138 D- 04 ″ as a central component in a cover-flow view and displaying additional information (e.g., track list of an album or playlist represented by the object  138 D- 04 ″). 
     (4) FIGS.  5 D 33 - 5 D 42  can be viewed as a continuation of FIGS.  5 D 15 - 5 D 24 , and implemented in the same embodiment. In FIGS.  5 D 33 - 5 D 42 , the example user interface  138 D- 02 ′ in the first configuration shows objects  138 D- 04   a ′ through  138 D- 04   d ′ (e.g., icons or thumbnails representing images, albums, playlists, or other documents or objects) in a grid view (as shown in FIG.  5 D 17 ). The example user interface  138 D- 02 ′ in the second configuration shows a selected object  138 D- 04 ′ as a central component in a cover-flow view. A third configuration is provided when the intensity of the contact increases to a deep press intensity threshold IT D  after the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ has reached the second configuration. In the third configuration, the central component in the cover-flow view is rotated and reversed to show additional information about the object  138 D- 04 ′. In FIGS.  5 D 33 - 5 D 42 , additional squishiness states are also described when the intensity of the contact increases beyond the deep press intensity threshold IT D . 
     More details of each of the above four categories of embodiments are provided below: 
     FIG.  5 D 1  illustrates an example user interface (e.g., a window  138 D- 02 ) containing a plurality of selectable user interface elements (e.g., selectable icons  138 D- 04   a  through  138 D- 04   d ). In some embodiments, the window  138 D- 02  is a window of an image editor application, and the selectable icons  138 D- 04   a  through  138 D- 04   d  each represent a respective image. In these embodiments, an operation associated with each selectable icon (e.g., icon  138 D- 04   a ) is to present a pop-up window for editing the image represented by the icon. In some embodiments, the window  138 D- 02  is a window of a music player application, and the selectable icons  138 D- 04   a  through  138 D- 04   d  each represent a respective music album or playlist. In these embodiments, an operation associated with each selectable icon (e.g., icon  138 D- 04   a ) is to present a pop-up window for displaying the track list of the respective music album or playlist represented by the icon. The user interface  138 D- 02  shown in  FIG. 5D-02  is in an initial display state S 1  when no gesture has been detected on the touch screen  112 . The window  138 D- 02  is in a grid view, and a user is enabled to browse through the rows and/or columns of icons with a swiping gesture to the left and right and/or up and down in the window  138 D- 02 . In some interfaces, selecting or clicking on the selectable icon (e.g., icon  138 D- 03   a ) would cause the corresponding pop-up window to be presented. In FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 16 , the visual feedback provided in the user interface is dependent on the changes in the intensity of the contact over a selected icon. 
     FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 2  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when an icon  138 D- 04   a  representing an image (e.g., an image titled “Wedding”) is selected by an initial contact of a gesture (e.g., contact  138 D- 08 ), and the contact intensity reaches above the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , the user interface  138 D- 02  changes from an initial display state S 1  (e.g., showing the image icons  138 D- 04   a  through  138 D- 04   d  uniformly in a grid view) to a modified initial display state S 1 ′ (e.g., showing the selected image icon  138 D- 04   a  in a highlighted manner different from other unselected icons). 
     FIGS.  5 D 3 - 5 D 6  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increases and decreases) in a range between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and a light press intensity threshold IT L , the device presents a pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  containing the selected image (e.g., the image titled “Wedding”) in the user interface  138 D- 02 . As shown in FIGS.  5 D 3 - 5 D 6 , the size of the pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  increases and decreases synchronously with the increase and decrease of the contact intensity. In some embodiments, the pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  also moves toward or retreats from the center of the user interface  138 D- 02  in response to the contact intensity increasing toward or decreasing from the light press intensity threshold IT L . The pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  shown in FIGS.  5 D 3 - 5 D 6  are in a series of non-steady, intermediate display states, and represents a preview of the pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  in the next steady state, namely, the augmented display state S 2 . The pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  in the intermediate display states is different (e.g., in size, position, color, opacity, and/or functionality) from the pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  in the augmented display state S 2 . As will be shown in FIG.  5 D 14 , the augmented display state S 2  shows a steady state pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  that includes editing tools, is displayed in either the full-screen mode or in the center of the user interface  138 D- 02 . 
     In the scenario illustrated in FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 7 , the intensity of the contact never exceeds the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end of the gesture is detected. As shown in FIGS.  5 D 6 - 5 D 7 , when the contact intensity subsequently drops to the contact detection intensity threshold again (as shown in FIG.  5 D 6 ), and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 D 7 ), the device returns the user interface  138 D- 02  to the modified display state S 1 ′ and eventually to the initial display state S 1  again. 
     FIG.  5 D 8  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 D- 08  (as indicated by the solid line  138 D- 10 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the icon  138 D- 04   a  in an unselected state. S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the icon  138 D- 04  in the user interface  138 D- 02 . I-a, I-b, and I-c are representatives of a series of intermediate display states between the initial display state S 1  and an augmented display state S 2  (not reached in FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 7 ). The series of intermediate displays states are presented in an animation A 1 . 
     In contrast to the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 8 , FIGS.  5 D 9 - 5 D 16  illustrate an alternative scenario in which the intensity of the contact does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L . The gesture causes the user interface  138 D- 02  to enter and subsequently remain in the augmented display state S 2  even after the end-of-gesture is detected. Thus, in some embodiments, the operation for putting the pop-up window into a steady open state is completed by the gesture. 
     FIGS.  5 D 9 - 5 D 12  illustrate that, in some embodiments, a pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  is presented in the user interface  138 D- 02  in response to a first portion of a gesture over the icon  138 D- 04   a . During the first portion of the gesture, intensity of the contact  138 D- 12  over the icon  138 D- 04   a  increases from zero to a value below the light press intensity threshold IT L . In response to the first portion of the gesture, the pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  containing the selected image is presented and the size of the pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  grows synchronously with the increase in the intensity of the contact. In addition, the pop-up window moves from the location of the selected icon  138 D- 04   a  toward the center of the window  138 D- 02  (or, optionally, toward the center of the touch screen  112 ) as it grows in size. 
     FIG.  5 D 13  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact finally increases to the light press intensity threshold IT L , the pop-up window  138 D- 07  has expanded to occupy the entire central region of the window  138 D- 02 , obscuring all the other icons previously displayed in the window  138 D- 02 . In some embodiments similar to those described with reference to FIG.  5 D 13 , the pop-up window  138 D- 07  will expand to occupy the entire touch screen  112 . FIG.  5 D 13  illustrates the augmented display state S 2  for the user interface  138 D- 02 . In the fully-expanded pop-up window  138 D- 07  shown in FIG.  5 D 13 , the selected image and various user interface elements for editing and otherwise manipulating the selected image are presented. In some embodiments, an animation is presented to show a smooth transition from the initial display state S 1  shown in FIG.  5 D 9  to the augmented display state S 2  of the user interface  138 D- 02  shown in FIG.  5 D 13 . 
     FIG.  5 D 14 - 5 D 15  illustrate that, in some embodiments, once the pop-up window  138 D- 07  has fully expanded and the user interface  138 D- 02  has entered the augmented display state S 2  in response to the contact intensity reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L , even when the intensity of the contact subsequently decreases to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 D 14 ) and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 D 15 ), the fully expanded pop-up window  138 D- 07  remains fully expanded in the central region of the user interface  138 D- 02 , and the user interface  138 D- 02  remains in the second display state S 2 . 
     FIG.  5 D 16  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 D- 12  (as indicated by the solid line  138 D- 14 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface  138 D- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the icons  138 D- 04   a  through  138 D- 04   d  in a grid view. S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the icon  138 D- 04   a . I-a and I-b are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing a pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  containing the selected image being presented and gradually growing in size synchronously with the increased contact intensity. S 2  is the augmented display state showing a fully expanded pop-up window  138 D- 07  containing the selected image and image editing tools, and occupying the center of the window  138 D- 02  or the touch screen  112 . The pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  shown in the intermediate display states I-a and I-b represents a preview of the pop-up window  138 D- 07  shown in the augmented display state S 2 . In some embodiments, after reaching the augmented display state S 2 , the user interface  138 D- 02  remains in the augmented display state S 2  regardless of the subsequent decrease of the contact intensity. An animation A 1  shows the transition from the initial display state S 1  to the augmented display state S 2 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting a subsequent increase in intensity of contact  138 D- 12  above IT L  followed by liftoff of contact  138 D- 12 , the device ceases to display the augmented display state S 2  and redisplays the initial display state S 1 . Additionally, in some embodiments, analogous operations are displayed with the deep press intensity threshold IT D  taking the place of the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  taking the place of the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (e.g., the initial display state is displayed until contact reaches intensity at IT L  and the augmented display state S 2  is displayed when contact reaches an intensity at IT D ). 
     FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 16  have largely been described in terms of an image editing application, with the icons representing images, and the pop-up window showing an image editing user interface. In an alternative embodiment, the user interface  138 D- 02  is a music player application, with icons representing albums and/or playlists, and the pop-up window showing the track list of a selected album or playlist. 
     FIGS.  5 D 17 - 5 D 23  illustrate an embodiment in which the augmented display state S 2  of the user interface  138 D- 02  shows the selected icon  138 D- 04   a  as a central component in a cover-flow view, as opposed to a pop-up window. For ease of discussion, in the alternative embodiment shown in FIG.  5 D 17 - 5 D 23 , the user interface is referenced as user interface  138 D- 02 ′, the selected icon is referenced as  138 D- 04 ′. However, many previous descriptions of the user interface  138 D- 02  and icon  138 D- 04  still apply to the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ and the icon  138 D- 04 ′. 
     As shown in FIGS.  5 D 17 - 5 D 18 , a gesture is detected, and the contact  138 D- 16  of the gesture is over an icon  138 D- 04   a ′ in a window  138 D- 02 ′ shown on the touch screen  112 . In response to the intensity of the contact reaching from zero to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , the icon  138 D- 04   a ′ changes from an unselected state (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 17 ) to a highlighted state (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 18 ). 
     FIGS.  5 D 19 - 5 D 20  illustrate that, in some embodiments, as the intensity of the contact increases, the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′ is converted to an object  138 D- 18 . In some embodiments, when the window  138 D- 02 ′ is a window of an image editor, the object  138 D- 18  contains an image represented by the icon  138 D- 04   a ′. In some embodiments, when the window  138 D- 02 ′ is a window of a music player, the object  138 D- 18  is an enlarged front cover of an album represented by the icon  138 D- 04   a ′. As shown in FIGS.  5 D 19 - 5 D 20 , the object  138 D- 18  gradually grows in size and moves towards the center of the window  138 D- 02 ′. At the same time, other unselected icons (e.g., icons  138 D- 04   b  through  138 D- 04   d ) are also resized and rearranged around the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′. The intermediate display states I-a and I-b shown in FIGS.  5 D 19 - 5 D 20  represent a preview of the window  138 D- 02  in a cover-flow view, with the object  138 D- 18  as the central component in the cover-flow view. The intermediate display states I-a and I-b shown in FIGS.  5 D 19  and  5 D 20  are non-steady states, and the window  138 D- 02 ′ will return to the initial display state S 1  shown in FIG.  5 D 17  if the gesture is terminated before it increases to the light press intensity threshold IT L . 
     FIG.  5 D 21  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact continues to increase and finally reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the window  138 D- 02 ′ is rearranged into the cover-flow view. In the cover-flow view, the object  138 D- 18  occupies the central position of the cover-flow view, and transformed versions of two other unselected icons (e.g., icons  138 D- 04   b ′ and  138 D- 04   c ′) occupy the secondary positions to the left and right of the object  138 D- 18 . In some embodiments, the device display an animation showing the smooth transition from the initial display state S 1  shown in FIG.  5 D 17  to the augmented display state S 2  shown in FIG.  5 D 21 . 
     FIGS.  5 D 22 - 5 D 23  illustrate that, in some embodiments, the window  138 D- 02 ′ remains in the augmented display state S 2  (e.g., in the cover-flow view) even when the intensity of the contact subsequently decreased to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 D 22 ) and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 D 23 ). 
     In some embodiments, the user can subsequently use other input (e.g., a swipe gesture) to browse left and right to other icons in the cover-flow view. In some embodiments, the user can use another input (e.g., a flick gesture or tap gesture on the center object  138 D- 18 ) to flip over the center object  138 D- 18  in the cover-flow view. In some embodiments, when the center object  138 D- 18  is flipped over, track list of the album or playlist represented by the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′ is presented on the reverse side of the center object  138 D- 18 . 
     In some embodiments similar to those shown in FIGS.  5 D 17 - 5 D 23 , if a first portion of a gesture caused the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ to transition into the cover-flow view shown in FIG.  5 D 21 , and a second portion of the same gesture includes a deeper press reaching above the deep press threshold IT D , the device causes the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ to transition from the first augmented display state S 2  into a second augmented display state S 3 . In the first augmented display state S 2 , the icons are shown in a cover-flow view as shown in FIG.  5 D 21 . In the second augmented display state S 3 , the reverse side of the center object  138 D- 18  is shown in the cover-flow view. In some embodiments, the device displays an animation showing the flipping over of the center object  138 D- 18  in response to the increasing intensity of the contact from the light press intensity threshold IT L  to the deep press intensity threshold IT D . In some embodiments, the reverse side of the center object  138 D- 18  shows the track list of the album or playlist represented by the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′. In some embodiments, if the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′ represents a photo album, the front side of the center object  138 D- 18  shows a front cover of the photo album, and the reverse side of the center-object  138 D- 18  will show a set of thumbnails of all or a subset of all images in the photo album. 
     FIG.  5 D 24  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 D- 16  (as indicated by the solid line  138 D- 20 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing icons in a grid view. S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the icon  138 D- 04   a ′. I-a and I-b are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing the transition from the grid view to a cover-flow view of the icons. An animation A 1  shows the transition from the initial display state S 1  (showing the unselected icons in the grid view) to the augmented display state (showing a transformed version  138 D- 18  of the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′ as the central component in a cover-flow view). 
     FIGS.  5 D 25 - 5 D 32  illustrate an alternative embodiment to that shown in FIGS.  5 D 17 - 5 D 24 . In this alternative embodiment, when a gesture is detected on an icon  138 D- 04   a ″ representing a music album or playlist in a window  138 D- 02 ″, in addition to displaying intermediate display states transitioning from a grid view into a cover-flow view, a preview of the track list for the album or playlist represented by the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ″ is also presented during the intermediate display states. In response to the intensity of the contact reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L , the user interface transitions into an augmented display state S 2  in which the track list is of the selected album or playlist is fully presented in the user interface. 
     FIGS.  5 D 25 - 5 D 26  illustrate that, in some embodiments, as the contact  138 D- 22  of a gesture is detected (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 26 ) on an icon  138 D- 04   a ″ representing an album or playlist, the icon  138 D- 04   a ″ changes from an unselected state to a selected state. 
     As the intensity of the contact increases toward the light press intensity threshold IT L , the selected album icon  138 D- 04   a ″ transforms into an object  138 D- 24  which gradually expands and moves toward the center of the window  138 D- 02 ″ synchronously with the increasing contact intensity, as shown in FIGS.  5 D 27 - 5 D 28 . In some embodiments, other unselected icons are also transformed and rearranged in window  138 D- 02 ″, such that the overall arrangement of the window  138 D- 02 ″ gradually approaches a cover-flow configuration. In addition, as the object preview  138 D- 24  gradually expands, text showing the track list of the album represented by the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ″ is displayed on the expanding object preview  138 D- 24 . In some embodiments, the size of the text grows with the expanding icon, as shown in FIGS.  5 D 27 - 5 D 28 . In some embodiments, when there is not enough space in the expanding object preview  138 D- 24  to show the entire track list, the track list is gradually rotated (e.g., scrolled) through the available space on the expanding object preview  138 D- 24 , as shown in FIGS.  5 D 27 - 5 D 28 . If the gesture is subsequently terminated before the contact intensity ever reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , the user interface  138 D- 02 ″ will revert to the initial display state S 1  shown in FIG.  5 D 25 . 
     FIG.  5 D 29  shows that the intensity of the contact has increased to the light press intensity threshold IT L , and the track list of the album or playlist is fully displayed on the fully expanded object  138 D- 25  located at the center of the window  138 D- 02 . In some embodiments, as shown in FIG.  5 D 29 , the user interface  138 D- 02 ″ has also completed the transition from the grid view to the cover-flow view, with the object  138 D- 25  as the center component of the cover-flow view, and transformed versions of two unselected icons  138 D- 04   b ″ and  138 D- 04   c ″ in the secondary positions. The display state shown in FIG.  5 D 29  is the augmented display state S 2  of the user interface  138 D- 02 ″. 
     FIG.  5 D 30 - 5 D 31  illustrate that, in some embodiments, once the user interface  138 D- 02 ″ has transitioned into the augmented display state S 2  (as shown in FIG.  5 D 29 ), the user interface  138 D- 02 ″ remains in the augmented display state S 2  even when the intensity of the contact subsequently drops to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 D 30 ) and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 D 31 ). 
     FIG.  5 D 32  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 D- 22  (as indicated by the solid line  138 D- 26 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface  138 D- 02 ″ over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing icons in a grid view. S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the icon  138 D- 04   a ″. I-a and I-b are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing the transition from the grid view to a cover-flow view of the icons. In addition, I-a and I-b also shows a preview of the track list of an album or playlist represented by the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ″. S 2  is the augmented display state of the user interface  138 D- 02 ″, showing the complete track list presented on a central component of the cover-flow view. An animation A 1  shows the smooth transition from the initial display state S 1  to the augmented display state S 2 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting a subsequent increase in intensity of contact  138 D- 22  above IT L  followed by liftoff of contact  138 D- 22 , the device ceases to display the augmented display state S 2  and redisplays the initial display state S 1 . Additionally, in some embodiments, analogous operations are displayed with the deep press intensity threshold IT D  taking the place of the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  taking the place of the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (e.g., the initial display state is displayed until contact reaches intensity at IT L  and the augmented display state S 2  is displayed when contact reaches an intensity at IT D ). 
     FIGS.  5 D 33 - 5 D 42  illustrate a continuation of a scenario in which a first portion of a gesture has cause the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ (also shown in FIGS.  5 D 17 - 5 D 23 ) to enter a first augmented display state S 2 . In the first portion of the gesture, a contact  138 D- 28  with a contact intensity reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L  has been detected. In the first augmented display state S 2  (shown in both FIG.  5 D 33  and FIG.  5 D 21 ), a selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′ under the contact  138 D- 28  has been transformed into an object  138 D- 18 , and presented as a center component in a cover-flow view of the user interface  138 D- 02 ′. The object shows a front cover image of an album or playlist represented by the selected icon  138 D- 04   a′.    
     FIGS.  5 D 34 - 5 D 37  illustrates that, in some embodiments, after the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ has reached the first augmented display state S 2 , if the second portion of the gesture includes further increases of the contact intensity beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays a series of additional intermediate display states between the first augmented display state S 2  and a second augmented display state S 3  (shown in FIG.  5 D 38 ). The series of additional intermediate display state (e.g., I-c, I-d, I-e, and I-f) shows the gradual rotation of the center object  138 D- 18  around a central axis (e.g., either a horizontal axis as shown in FIGS.  5 D 34 - 5 D 37 , or a vertical axis) in the plane of the object  138 D- 18 . The second augmented display state S 3  shows the reverse side of the center object  138 D- 18 . As shown in FIGS.  5 D 37 - 5 D 38 , the reverse side of the object  138 D- 18  displays the track list of the album or playlist represented by the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′. In some embodiments, the rate of rotation of the object  138 D- 18  is selected based on the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 D- 28 . If the intensity of the contact oscillate in the range between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the object  138 D- 18  rotates forward and backward synchronously with the changing contact intensity. 
     FIG.  5 D 38  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact subsequently reaches the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the reverse side of the object  138 D- 18  is shown front and center in the cover-flow view. The track list of the album or playlist represented by the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′ is presented on the reverse side of the object  138 D- 18 . The user interface  138 D- 02 ′ is now in the second augmented display state S 3 . 
     FIG.  5 D 39  shows that, in some embodiments, as the intensity of the contact continues to increase beyond the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the device displays one or more squishiness display states (e.g., state I-g) of the user interface  138 D- 02 ′. In some embodiments, the squishiness display states show further rotation of the object  138 D- 18  in the same direction as before (e.g., the direction of rotation leading to the second augmented display state S 3 ). When the contact intensity decreases in the range above the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the object  138 D- 18  would rotate in the reverse direction (e.g., springs back) toward its position in the second augmented display state. In some embodiments, during the transition from the first augmented display state S 2  to the second augmented display state S 3 , the rate of rotation is associated with the intensity of the contact  138 D- 18  by a first coefficient (e.g., a first torsion constant). In some embodiments, when displaying the squishiness display states, the rate of rotation is associated with the intensity of contact by a second coefficient (e.g., a second torsion constant). In some embodiments, the second coefficient is greater than the first coefficient. Thus, in some embodiments, a greater amount of change in contact intensity is required to rotate the object  138 D- 18  by a given amount in during the squishiness states than during the intermediate states between the augmented display states S 2  and S 3 . In some embodiments, the second coefficient continues to diminish (e.g., at constant or growing rate) as the currently detected contact intensity increases. In such embodiments, a tolerance intensity threshold is set so that when the torsion intensity threshold is reached, the second coefficient is reduced to zero. 
     FIG.  5 D 40 - 5 D 41  illustrate that, in some embodiments, once the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ has reached the second augmented display state S 2 , if the intensity of the contact subsequently drops below the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ will remain in the second augmented display state S 3 . FIG.  5 D 40  shows the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ remaining in the second augmented display state S 3  when the contact intensity has dropped to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 . FIG.  5 D 41  shows the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ remaining in the second augmented display state S 3  when the contact intensity has dropped to zero. 
     FIG.  5 D 42  is a diagram illustrating the changes in intensity of the contact  138 D- 28  (as indicated by the solid line  138 D- 30 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the window  138 D- 02 ′ over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the unselected icons in a grid view. S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the icon  138 D- 04   a ′. S 2  is the first augmented display state of the user interface  138 D- 02 ′, showing a transformed version (e.g., object  138 D- 18 ) of the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′ as the center component in a cover-flow view. I-a and I-b are representatives of a series of intermediate display states between the initial display state S 1  and the first augmented display state S 2 . An animation A 1  is presented to show the transitions between the initial display state S 1  and the first augmented display state S 2 . Although a single gesture is shown by curve  138 D- 30 , the part of the curve before S 2  is, optionally, performed by a different gesture. I-c through I-f are additional intermediate display states between the first augmented display state S 2  and the second augmented display state S 3 . The second augmented display state S 3  shows the reversed side of the object  138 D- 18  displaying the track list of the album or play list represented by the selected icon  138 D- 04   a ′. Animation A 2  shows the gradual rotation of the object  138 D- 18  in response to increasing contact intensity between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the deep press intensity threshold IT D . I-g is a squishiness display state going beyond the second augmented display state. Animation A 3  is used to present the squishiness display states beyond the second augmented display state S 3 . Animation A 3  is a continuation of Animation A 2 , and animation A 2  is a continuation of Animation A 1 . When the contact intensity drops to the deep press intensity threshold IT D , the user interface  138 D- 02 ′ returns to the second augmented display state S 3 , and remains in S 3 . 
     FIGS.  5 E 1 - 5 E 16  illustrate the visual feedback provided when a gesture is directed to a show/hide indicator (e.g., show/hide indicator  138 E- 04 ) in a user interface (e.g., window  138 E- 02 ). FIGS.  5 E 1 - 5 E 8  shows visual feedback provided in response to a gesture whose contact intensity never exceeded the light press intensity threshold IT L . FIGS.  5 E 9 - 5 E 16  illustrate the visual feedback provided in response to another gesture whose contact intensity does exceed the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end-of-gesture is detected. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described in this specification, including the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6M . 
     The contrast between the feedbacks shown in FIGS.  5 E 1 - 5 E 8  and FIGS.  5 E 9 - 5 E 16  illustrate how a gesture on a show/hide indicator can cause a preview of the hidden text associated with the show/hide indicator without completing the operation to show the hidden text; and alternatively, how a gesture on the show/hide indicator can cause the preview of the hidden text to be present and eventually complete the operation to show the hidden text. 
     FIG.  5 E 1  illustrate an example user interface (e.g., window  138 E- 02 ) containing one or more selectable user interface elements (e.g., triangular show-hide indicators  138 E- 04  and  138 E- 10 ). The show-hide indicators  138 E- 04  and  138 E- 10  each have two configurations, one for showing its associated hidden text and the other for hiding its associated hidden text. As shown in FIG.  5 E 1 , when the triangular show/hide indicator points to the right (e.g., as illustrated by the show/hide indicator  138 E- 04 ), its associated hidden text is hidden. In contrast, when the triangular show/hide indicator points downward (as illustrated by the show/hide indicator  138 E- 10 ), its associated hidden text is shown in a text presentation object (e.g., in a drop-down list or a text bubble). In various embodiments, the show/hide indicator optionally takes different forms. For example, in some embodiments, a show/hide indicator is a toggle button, and associated text (e.g., a tooltip, a list, a definition, a translation, or other snippet of information) is displayed in a pop-up text bubble or hidden depending on whether the toggle button is on or off. For another example, in some embodiments, a show/hide indicator is a plus/minus button (“+/−” button), and associated text is displayed in an expanded list or hidden depending on whether the button shows the plus sign or the minus sign. In FIGS.  5 E 1 - 5 E 16 , the show/hide indicator is a triangular element, the hidden text is multiple text items (e.g., filenames) shown in a drop-down list. 
     FIG.  5 E 2  illustrates that, in some embodiments, a gesture has been detected, and the contact  138 E- 08  of the gesture is over the show/hide indicator  138 - 04  in its hide state (e.g., the state in which its associated hidden text is hidden). In some embodiments, no change is shown in the user interface  138 E- 02  at this point. In some embodiments, in response to the initial intensity of the contact reaching the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , the device changes the appearance (e.g., transparency, size, color, etc.) of the show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  slightly to indicate the detection of the gesture. 
     FIGS.  5 E 3 - 5 E 4  illustrate that, in some embodiments, as the intensity of the contact continues to increase in a range from the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  to the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device presents a preview of the hidden text in response to the increasing contact intensity. The preview of the hidden text shows one or more text items in a gradually expanding drop-down list preview  138 E- 06  emerging from a location proximate to the show/hide indicator  138 E- 04 . The amount of hidden text presented in the drop-down list preview  138 E- 06  corresponds to the currently detected contact intensity, as shown in FIGS.  5 E 3 - 5 E 4 . In some embodiments, as shown in FIG.  5 E 4 , when the gradually expanding drop-down list preview  138 E- 06  is about to obscure other items (e.g., a drop-down list  138 E- 12 ) in the user interface, the device rearranges these items (e.g., moves the drop-down list  138 E- 12  and associated show/hide indicator  138 E- 10 ) to make room for the gradually expanding drop-down list preview  138 E- 06 . 
     FIG.  5 E 5  illustrates that, in some embodiments, in some embodiments, before the intensity of the contact ever reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , if the contact intensity decreases, the device reduces the amount of hidden text presented accordingly. The drop-down list preview  138 E- 06  is retracted back toward the show-hide indicator  138 E- 04 . 
     In some embodiments, the device gradually rotates the triangular show/hide indicator from its hide state to its show state by an amount corresponding to the currently detect contact intensity when the contact intensity is below the light press intensity threshold IT L . The rotating show/hide indicator would provide information to a user regarding how much more of the hidden text still remains hidden at any given time. The rotation of the triangular show/hide indicator would is suitable for device with a display separate from its touch-sensitive surface, where the view of the triangular show/hide indicator is not blocked by the contact  138 E- 08 . In some embodiments, if the triangular show/hide indicator is likely to be blocked by the object (e.g., finger) making the contact  138 E- 08  on the touch screen  112 , a floating dial is shown on the user interface to indicate how much more of the hidden text still remains hidden at any given time. 
     FIGS.  5 E 6 - 5 E 7  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact subsequently drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 E 6 ), and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 E 7 ), the device returns the user interface  138 E- 02  to its initial display state S 1 , so that the hidden text associated with the selected show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  is concealed from view again. 
     FIG.  5 E 8  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 E- 08  (as indicated by the solid line  138 E- 14 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface  138 E- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  in the hide state. I-a, I-b, and I-c are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing the preview of the hidden text associated with the show/hide indicator  138 E- 04 . During the intermediate display states, the amount of hidden text presented in the user interface  138 E- 02  corresponds to the value of the currently detected contact intensity. The series of intermediate display states is shown in an animation A 1  linking the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state (not reached in FIGS.  5 E 1 - 5 E 7 ). As will be shown later, the augmented display state shows some or all of the hidden text associated with the selected show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  in a steady state. In some embodiments, the rate of change in the animation corresponds to the rate of change in the contact intensity. In some embodiments, the rate of change in the animation slows down when the contact intensity approaches the light press intensity threshold IT L . 
     FIGS.  5 E 9 - 5 E 16  illustrate an alternative scenario in which the intensity of the contact does exceed the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end of gesture is detected. In this alternative scenario, the device presents the augmented display state S 2  showing some or all of the hidden text associated with the selected show/hide indicator  138 E- 04 , and the user interface  138 E- 02  remains in the augmented display state S 2  when the device detects the end of the gesture. 
     As shown in FIGS.  5 E 9 - 5 E 10 , a gesture (with a contact  138 E- 16 ) directed to the show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  is detected. In FIG.  5 E 11 , as the intensity of the contact continues to increase from the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  toward the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays more and more of the hidden text associated with the selected show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  in a drop-down list preview  138 E- 06 . In some embodiments, the device also rearranges other items in the user interface  138 E- 02  to make room for the expanding drop-down list preview  138 E- 06 , as shown in FIGS.  5 E 11 - 5 E 12 . 
     FIG.  5 E 12  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays all of the hidden text (e.g., all 6 items) associated with the selected show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  in a fully expanded drop-down list  138 E- 07  (although, in some circumstances only some of the hidden text is displayed). In some embodiments, a haptic feedback is provided on the touch-sensitive surface of the touch screen  112  to indicate that the augmented display state S 2  of the user interface  138 E- 02  has been reached. In some embodiments, the animation showing the expansion of the drop-down list  138 E- 06  is paused briefly right before the fully expanded list  138 E- 07  is displayed to indicate the entry into the augmented display state S 2 . In some embodiments, an audio signal is played to indicate the entry into the augmented display state S 2 . 
     In some embodiments, when the contact intensity has reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , the show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  is completely rotated such that it now points downward (e.g., in its “show” state). In some embodiments, if a floating dial was presented while the contact intensity is approaching the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device removes the floating dial from the user interface  138 E- 02  once the user interface has entered the augmented display state S 2 . 
     FIG.  5 E 13  shows that, in some embodiments, subsequent increase of the contact intensity beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L  leads to no further visual feedback in the user interface  138 E- 02 . In some embodiments similar to those shown in FIG.  5 E 13 , subsequent increase in intensity of the contact will cause the device to display one or more squishiness display states. For example, in some embodiments, in response to continued changes (e.g., increases and decreases) in the contact intensity above the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device shows slight flexing (e.g., expansions and contractions) of the drop-down list  138 E- 07  without changing the amount of hidden text shown in the drop-down list  138 E- 07 . 
     FIGS.  5 E 14 - 5 E 15  illustrate that, in some embodiments, after the device has caused the user interface  138 E- 02  to enter the augmented display state S 2  in response to the contact intensity reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L , the user interface  138 E- 02  remains in the augmented display state S 2  with drop down list  138 E- 07  displayed, even after the intensity of the contact subsequently drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 E 14 ) and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 E 15 ). 
     In some embodiments similar to those described above with reference to FIGS.  5 E 14 - 5 E 15 , while the user interface  138 E- 02  is in the augmented display state S 2  (e.g., showing all the hidden text associated with the show/hide indicator  138 D- 04 ), a subsequent gesture (e.g., a tap gesture) on the show/hide indicator or the drop-down list  138 D- 07  will cause the show/hide indicator  138 D- 04  to return to the hide state and removal of the drop-down list  138 D- 07  from the user interface  138 E- 02 . 
     In some embodiments, while the user interface  138 E- 02  is in the augmented display state S 2 , if the intensity of the same contact  138 E- 16  increases to the deep press intensity threshold, the device will return the show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  to its hide state and return the user interface to the initial display state S 1  again. 
     FIG.  5 E 16  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 E- 16  (as indicated by the solid line  138 E- 18 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface  138 E- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the show/hide indicator  138 E- 04  in the hide state. S 2  represents the augmented display state showing all of the hidden text associated with the selected show/hide indicator  138 E- 04 . I-a is a representative of a series of intermediate display states showing the preview of the hidden text, where the amount of hidden text presented in the user interface  138 E- 02  corresponds to the value of the currently detected contact intensity. The series of intermediate display states is shown in an animation A 1  linking the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2 . Once the user interface  138 E- 02  enters the augmented display state S 2 , it remains in the augmented display state S 2 , regardless of the subsequent values of the contact intensity. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a subsequent increase in intensity of contact  138 E- 16  above IT L  followed by liftoff of contact  138 E- 16 , the device ceases to display the augmented display state S 2  and redisplays the initial display state S 1 . Additionally, in some embodiments, analogous operations are displayed with the deep press intensity threshold IT D  taking the place of the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  taking the place of the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (e.g., the initial display state is displayed until contact reaches intensity at IT L  and the augmented display state S 2  is displayed when contact reaches an intensity at IT D ). 
     FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 10  illustrate the visual feedback provided in response to a gesture directed to an icon associated with a plurality of documents or objects, where the intensity of the contact never exceeded the light press intensity threshold IT L . FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 22  illustrate the visual feedback provided in response to another gesture directed to the same icon, where the intensity of the contact does exceed the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end-of-gesture is detected. In addition, FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 22  also illustrate the visual feedback provided in response to continued increase of contact intensity beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L  and a tolerance intensity threshold IT T . The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described in this specification, including the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6M . 
     FIG.  5 F 1  illustrates a user interface (e.g., desktop  138 F- 02 ) containing a plurality of user interface elements (e.g., selectable icons  138 F- 04   a  through  138 F- 04   d ). The selectable icons  138 F- 04  each represent either an application or a folder. For example, the icon  138 F- 04   a  represents a folder containing one or more folder items (e.g., documents or images). The icon  138 F- 04   d  represents a document viewing/editing application associated with a set of documents (e.g., open documents, recent documents, or favorite document, etc.). The icons  138 F- 04   b  and  138 F- 04   c  each represent a document playing/editing application associated with a set of documents (e.g., open documents, recent documents, or favorite document). In general, when the icons  138 F- 04   a  through  138 F- 04   d  are clicked in some user interfaces, the device performs an operation to open the associated application or folder. FIG.  5 F 1  shows that desktop  138 F- 02  in an initial display state S 1  in which all of the icons  138 F- 04   a  through  138 F- 04   d  resides in a dock, and none of the icons are currently selected. 
     FIG.  5 F 2  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the device detects a gesture, and the contact  138 F- 08  of the gesture is over the icon  138 F- 04   d  (e.g., an application icon), the device displays a modified initial state S 1 ′ of the user interface  138 F- 02  indicating selection of the icon  138 F- 04   d . For example, as shown in FIG.  5 F 2 , the device highlights the selected icon  138 F- 04   d  in response to detecting the contact  138 F- 08 . 
     FIGS.  5 F 3 - 5 F 6  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact continues to increase within a range between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device presents a series of intermediate display states in which reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects associated with the selected icon  138 F- 04   d  are presented. 
     Specifically, in this example, the user interface objects associated with the application icon  138 F- 04   d  are a set of selectable document icons or selectable document previews for a collection of documents associated with the application. In some embodiments, the collection of documents include all or a subset of all documents currently open in the application, all or a subset of all previously open documents in the application, or all or a subset of all favorite documents for the application. The reduced-scaled representations of the set of selectable document icons or document previews are a set of preview icons (e.g., preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d ). In some embodiments, before the contact reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the additional icons are not selectable (e.g., the additional icons do not respond to selection inputs from the user). The appearance of the preview icons differs from the selectable document icons or previews they represent in various aspects (e.g., structure, color, size, opacity, etc.) 
     In the series of intermediate display states (e.g., the intermediate display states I-a, I-c, and I-c shown in FIGS.  5 F 3 - 5 F 6 ), the device shows the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  to  138 F- 06   d  gradually fly out in a sequence from the selected application icon  138 F- 04   d . The preview icons  138 F- 06   a  to  138 F- 06   d  gradually spread out according to a predetermined arrangement in the user interface  138 F- 02 . In some embodiments, the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 04   d  moves along a trajectory. In some embodiments, the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 04   d  move as if they were connected by a plurality of springs. In some embodiments, the movement (e.g., as reflected by one or more of speed, direction, current location, and acceleration, etc.) of the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  is associated with the currently detected contact intensity as if a force dragging preview icons across the user interface  138 F- 02  is based on the contact intensity value of contact  138 F- 08 . FIG.  5 F 5  also illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the contact intensity increases, the appearance of the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  optionally also change. For example, FIG.  5 F 5  shows filename labels of the documents gradually sliding out of the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d . In some embodiments, the appearance of the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  gradually approaches the appearance of the selectable document icons or document previews they represent, as the intensity of the contact approaches the light press intensity threshold IT L . 
     FIGS.  5 F 6 - 5 F 7  illustrate that, in some embodiments, before the intensity of the contact ever reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , if the contact intensity decreases again, the device shows the preview icons  138 F- 06   a    138 F- 06   d  gradually being pulled back toward the selected application icon  138 F- 04   a  along their, respective, original trajectories (or a different trajectory). The filename labels shown on the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  are also gradually retracted back into the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d.    
     FIGS.  5 F 8 - 5 F 9  illustrate that, in some embodiments, since the intensity of the contact never reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , when the intensity of the contact subsequently drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 F 8 ) and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 F 9 ), the device displays the desktop  138 F- 02  in its initial display state S 1 . The desktop  138 F- 02  shows the unselected icons  138 F- 04   a  through  138 F- 04   d  on the desktop  138 F- 02  again without displaying any associated objects. 
     FIG.  5 F 10  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 F- 08  (as indicated by the solid line  138 F- 10 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing unselected icons  138 F- 04   a  through  138 F- 04   d . S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the application icon  138 F- 04   d . I-a, I-b and I-c are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing a preview of a collection of selectable document icons (or selectable document previews) associated with selected application icon  138 F- 04   d . The preview of the selectable document icons (or selectable document previews) includes gradual spreading out of a set of preview representations of the selectable document icons (or document previews) along a trajectory originating from the selected application icon  138 F- 04   d . The series of intermediate display states is shown in an animation A 1  linking the initial display state S 1  and an augmented display state S 2  (not reached in FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 9 ), where the augmented display state S 2  shows the collection of selectable document icons (or document previews) associated with the selected application icon  138 F- 04   d . Since the intensity of the contact never reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the user interface  138 F- 02  returns to the initial display state S 1  when the end of the gesture is detected. 
     FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 22  illustrate an alternative scenario to that shown in FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 10 . In the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 22 , the intensity of the contact does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end of gesture is detected. As a result, the desktop  138 F- 02  enters the augmented display state S 2  in which the preview document icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  have been fully spread out on the user interface  138 F- 02  and have transformed into respective selectable document icons (or document previews) associated with the selected application icon  138 F- 04 . In addition, the desktop  138 F- 02  remains in this state after the end of gesture is detected. 
     In addition, FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 22  also illustrate the implementation of a tolerance intensity threshold IT T  above the light press intensity threshold IT L . When the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increases or decreases) in the range between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the tolerance intensity threshold IT T , the device displays a series of squishiness display states. The squishiness display states represent further changes in the user interface  138 F- 02  in response to the changes in the contact intensity. The further changes are typically a continuation of the changes the user interface went through right before reaching the augmented display state. In addition, when the contact intensity reaches the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  and above, the device displays a non-steady terminal display state (e.g., the final squishiness display state), and no longer responds to further increases in the contact intensity. 
     As shown in FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 12 , when the device detects a gesture with a contact  138 F- 12  over the application icon  138 F- 04   d , the device changes the appearance of the selected application icon  138 F- 04   d  to indicate its selection. 
     FIGS.  5 F 13 - 5 F 14  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact increases to a value below the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays an animation showing the collection of preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  gradually flying out of the selected application icon  138 F- 04   d  along a trajectory on the desktop  138 F- 02 . Filename labels of the preview icons also gradually emerge from the preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  with increasing contact intensity. This is the same behavior as shown in FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 5  above. 
     FIG.  5 F 15  illustrates that, in some embodiments, as the intensity of the contact continues to increase and reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the desktop  138 F- 02  enters the augmented display state S 2 . Specifically, in the augmented display state S 2 , the previously preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  have been fully spread out along a trajectory according to a predetermined arrangement (e.g., along a straight line). In addition, the previously preview icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  have completed their transformation into respective selectable document icons (or document previews) they previously represented (e.g., during the intermediate display states). In some embodiments, the device provides some changes in the appearance of the now selectable icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d , such as making them appear more solid or opaque as compared to their appearance in the preview). Subsequent selection of each of the now selectable icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  will cause the device to open a corresponding document in the application represented by the application icon  138 F- 04 . In some embodiments, if the user were to terminate the gesture now, the desktop  138 F- 02  will remain in the augmented display state S 2  shown in FIG.  5 F 15 , and the icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  will remain spread out and selectable. 
     FIG.  5 F 16  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact continues to increase beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays one or more squishiness display states to reflect the changes in the contact intensity. In some embodiments, the squishiness display state provides the appearance of some physical characteristics that are affected by the changes in the contact intensity above the light press intensity threshold IT L . In this example, the icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  continues to spread out a little further along their previous trajectories, but at a much slower rate, in response to the increasing contact intensity above IT L . The icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  appear to be held together with very stiff springs and moves in response to the changes (increases or decreases) in the contact intensity, as if the contact intensity corresponded to a force pulling on the icons. 
     FIG.  5 F 17  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the contact intensity reaches to and beyond the tolerance intensity threshold IT T , no further changes is provided in the desktop  138 F- 02 . The icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  remain at their respective extreme positions that they arrived at right before the contact intensity reached the tolerance intensity threshold IT T . 
     FIG.  5 F 18  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact drops to a range below the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  but above the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays the squishiness display states again according to the currently detected contact intensity. In the animation showing the squishiness display states, the icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  retreat along their previous trajectories slightly in response to the decreasing contact intensity, until the icons return to their respective positions in the augmented display state S 2  again. 
     FIG.  5 F 19  illustrates that, in some embodiments when the contact intensity drops to the light press intensity threshold IT L  again, the icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  are back to their respective positions in the augmented display state S 2  of the user interface  138 F- 12 . In some embodiments, in the squishiness display states, the device also changes the appearance of the icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  to indicate that the icons are not selectable in the squishiness display states. If the appearances of the icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  had been changed in the squishiness display states, the changes are reverted when the desktop returns to the augmented display state S 2  again. 
     FIGS.  5 F 20 - 5 F 21  illustrate that, in some embodiments, since the intensity of the contact has previously reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , when the contact intensity drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 F 20 ) and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 F 21 ), the device continues to display the desktop  138 F- 02  in the augmented display state S 2 . In the augmented display state S 2 , the icons (formerly  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  are fully spread out on the desktop  138 F- 02  in a predetermined arrangement and individually selectable and thus are now selectable user interface objects  138 F- 07   a  through  138 F- 07   d.    
     FIG.  5 F 22  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 F- 12  (as indicated by the solid line  138 F- 112 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the desktop  138 F- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing unselected icons  138 F- 04   a  through  138 F- 04   d . S 1 ′ represents the modified initial display state reflecting selection of the application icon  138 F- 04   d . I-b and I-c are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing the transition from the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2 . The augmented display state S 2  shows the icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  fully spread out according to a predetermined arrangement and individually selectable. The intermediate display states are presented in an animation A 1 . During the animation A 1 , the icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  are preview. I-c is a squishiness display state showing a transition between the augmented display state S 2  and a non-steady terminal display state S 3 . The squishiness display states are presented in an animation A 2  (and a reverse animation A 2 ′). The animation A 2  is a continuation of the animation A 1  leading to the augmented display state S 2 . The desktop  138 F- 02  remains in the terminal display state S 3  while the contact intensity is above the tolerance intensity threshold IT T . Since the intensity of the contact does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end-of-gesture is detected, the desktop  138 F- 02  returns to the augmented display state S 2  and remains in S 2  after the contact intensity drops below the light press intensity threshold IT L . In some embodiments, in response to detecting a subsequent increase in intensity of contact  138 F- 12  above IT L  followed by liftoff of contact  138 F- 12 , the device ceases to display the augmented display state S 2  and redisplays the initial display state S 1 . Additionally, in some embodiments, analogous operations are displayed with the deep press intensity threshold IT D  taking the place of the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  taking the place of the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (e.g., the initial display state is displayed until contact reaches intensity at IT L  and the augmented display state S 2  is displayed when contact reaches an intensity at IT D ). 
     Although the description of FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 22  is focused on the feedback provided when an application icon (e.g., the application icon  138 F- 04   d ) is invoked by a gesture, it should be recognized that analogous visual feedback will be provided when a different icon (e.g., the folder icon  138 F- 04   a ) is invoked by a gesture in a similar manner. For example, for a selected folder icon  138 F- 04   a , the collection of objects associated with the folder icon  138 F- 04   a  are selectable icons of folder items in a folder represented by the folder icon  138 F- 04   a , and the reduced-scale representations of the selectable icons of folder items are preview icons that appear different from the selectable icons. 
     FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 18  illustrate the visual feedback provided in response to gestures directed to a plurality of overlapping objects (e.g., images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d ) in an example user interface (e.g., an application window  138 G- 02 ). 
     FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 6  illustrate the plurality of overlapping objects (e.g., the overlapping images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d ) being partially spread out (e.g., at least some of the objects are still overlapping) in the application window  138 G- 02  in response to a gesture whose contact intensity never exceeded the light press intensity threshold IT L . FIGS.  5 G 7 - 5 G 18  illustrate the same plurality of overlapping objects being completely spread out (e.g., no two objects are still overlapping) in response to another gesture whose contact intensity does exceed the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end-of-gesture is detected. In addition,  FIGS. 5FG - 5 G 18  also illustrate the plurality of objects being further spread out slightly in response to continued increase of contact intensity beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L . When the contact intensity further increases beyond the tolerance intensity threshold IT T , the device presents a non-steady terminal display state and provides no further visual feedback until the contact intensity drops below the tolerance intensity threshold again. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described in this specification, including the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6M . 
     As shown in FIG.  5 G 1 , the device presents a slide  138 G- 06  containing a plurality of images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  in an application window  138 G- 02 . The plurality of images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  overlap with one another, and at least some objects obscure the view of other objects. In FIG.  5 G 1 , no gesture has been detected on the user interface  138 F- 02 . 
     FIG.  5 G 2  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the device detects a gesture with a contact  138 F- 08  over the slide  138 G- 06 , and the intensity of the contact gradually increases above the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , the device shows the plurality of overlapping images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  gradually spreading out from one another. As shown in FIG.  5 G 2 , the plurality of overlapping images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  have gradually moved away from their original positions (e.g., as indicated by the shaded areas), and at least some of the previously overlapping images (e.g., the pair of images  138 G- 04   a  and  138 G- 04   b , the pair of images  138 G- 04   c  and  138 G- 04   b , and the pair of objects  138 G- 04   c  and  138 G- 04   d ) are no longer overlapping. However, at least some of the previously overlapping images (e.g., the pair of objects  138 G- 04   b  and  138 G- 04   d ) are still overlapping, albeit to a lesser extent. In some embodiments, the shaded areas indicating the original positions of the images are not shown in the slide  138 F- 06 . 
     FIGS.  5 G 3 - 5 G 4  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the device detects increases (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 G 3 ) or decreases (as shown in FIG.  5 G 4 ) of the contact intensity in the range below the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device further spread out the plurality of images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 G 3 ) or restores the plurality of images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  toward their original positions (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 G 4 ) according to the changes in the detected contact intensity. 
     FIG.  5 G 5  illustrates that, in some embodiments, the device restores the plurality of objects  138 G- 106   a - d  to their original positions (e.g., overlapping with one another), when the intensity of the contact subsequently drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 G 5 ) and eventually to zero. At the end of the gesture, the device returns the window  138 G- 02  to its initial display state S 1 . 
     FIG.  5 G 6  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 G- 08  (as indicated by the solid line  138 G- 10 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface  138 G- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the plurality of images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  overlapping with one another. I-a and I-b are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing the relative distances of the plurality of objects increase or decrease in accordance with the increase or decrease of the contact intensity. In at least some of the intermediate display states, some of the previously overlapping objects no longer overlap, while some other previously overlapping objects are still overlapping. In this scenario, the contact intensity never reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , and the user interface  138 G- 02  never enters the augmented display state in which the plurality of images have spread out to and remain in a completely non-overlapping configuration. The series of intermediate display states are shown in an animation A 1 . Since the intensity of the contact never reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the user interface  138 G- 02  returns to the initial display state S 1  when the end of the gesture is detected. 
     FIGS.  5 G 7 - 5 G 18  illustrate an alternative scenario to that shown in FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 7 . In the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 G 7 - 5 G 18 , the intensity of the contact does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end of gesture is detected. As a result, the user interface  138 G- 02  enters an augmented display state in which all of the previously overlapping images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  in the slide  138 G- 04  are fully spread out and no longer overlapping. In addition, the plurality of images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  remain in this completely non-overlapping configuration after the end-of-gesture is detected. In addition to the augmented display state, FIGS.  5 G 7 - 5 G 18  also illustrate the implementation of a tolerance intensity threshold IT T  and a plurality of squishiness display states displayed when the contact intensity increases to a level above the light press intensity threshold IT L . 
     As shown in FIGS.  5 G 7 - 5 G 9 , when the device detects a gesture with a contact  138 G- 12  over the slide  138 G- 06 , and the intensity of the contact increases in a range above the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and below the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays the gradual spreading out of the plurality of overlapping images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  shown in the slide  138 G- 06 . This behavior is the same as that shown in FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 3  above. 
     In FIG.  5 G 10 , the device detects that the intensity of the contact has increased to the light press intensity threshold IT L . In response to such detection, the device shows the plurality of overlapping objects completely spread out and laid out in a completely non-overlapping configuration. In some embodiments, if there is not enough space in the slide  138 G- 02  to show all of the images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  in a completely non-overlapping configuration, the device shrinks the plurality of images such that they are, optionally, arranged in a completely non-overlapping configuration. FIG.  5 G 10  shows that the user interface  138 G- 02  has reached its augmented display state S 2 . Although FIGS.  5 G 7 - 5 G 10  shows the plurality of images spreading out from their original positions in a radiating fashion, in various embodiments, the device optionally rearranges the plurality of objects in other configurations (e.g., arranged in a grid view or in a ring) such that they no longer overlap. In some embodiments, the device selects the most suitable configuration to display the plurality of images  138 G 7 - 5 G 10  in a completely non-overlapping fashion in the slide  138 G- 06  as the augmented display state S 2  for the user interface  138 G- 02 . Once such a configuration has been determined, the device selects the intermediate display states (e.g., state I-a and I-b shown in FIGS.  5 G 8 - 5 G 9 ) for the user interface  138 G- 02  based on the relative magnitude between the currently detected contact intensity and the light press intensity threshold IT L . 
     FIG.  5 G 11  shows that, in some embodiments, when the device detects further increases of the contact intensity above the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays the user interface  138 G- 02  in a series of squishiness display states (e.g., state I-c). In the squishiness display states, the plurality of images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  are further spread out from their respective positions in the augmented display state S 2  (shown in FIG.  5 G 10 ) toward the edge of the display area containing the slide  138 G- 06 . In some embodiments, the amount of further spreading corresponds to the amount that the currently detected contact intensity is above the light press intensity threshold IT L . The animation showing the squishiness display states is a continuation of the animation leading to the augmented display state S 2 . 
     FIG.  5 G 12  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the device detects that the intensity of the contact has increased to the tolerance intensity threshold IT T , the device displays the user interface  138 G- 02  in a non-steady terminal display state S 3 . In the terminal display state S 3 , the plurality of images have been spread out to an extreme position (e.g., at least one of the images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  has reached the edge of the display area containing the slide  138 G- 06 . 
     FIG.  5 G 13  shows that, in some embodiments, further increases of the contact intensity beyond the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  will not cause the device to provide further visual feedback in the user interface  138 G- 02 . Thus, in some embodiments, the user interface  138 G- 02  remains in the terminal display state S 3  for all contact intensity above the tolerance intensity threshold IT T . 
     FIG.  5 G 14  shows that, in some embodiments, once the contact intensity drops back to a range between the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  and the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays the user interface in the squishiness display states again, and shows the plurality of images being retracted from their extreme positions toward their fully spread out positions in the augmented display state S 2 . 
     FIG.  5 G 15  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact drops back to the light press intensity threshold IT L  again, the user interface  138 G- 02  returns to the augmented display state S 2  again, and the plurality of images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  return to the previous configuration in which they no longer overlap. 
       138 G 16 - 5 G 17  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact subsequently drops to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 G 16 ), and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 G 17 ), the device maintains the user interface  138 G- 02  in the augmented display state S 2  (e.g., showing all of the images in the slide  138 G- 06  in a completely non-overlapping configuration). 
     FIG.  5 G 18  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 G- 12  (as indicated by the solid line  138 G- 14 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface  138 G- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the plurality of images  138 G- 06   a  through  138 G- 04   d  overlapping with one another. I-a and I-b are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing the relative distances of the plurality of images increasing in accordance with the currently detected contact intensity. In this scenario, the contact intensity reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , and the user interface  138 G- 02  enters the augmented display state S 2 . In the augmented display state S 2 , the plurality of images are placed in a completely non-overlapping configuration. The series of intermediate display states between the initial display states S 1  and the augmented display state S 2  are shown in a continuous animation A 1 . Subsequent increase of the contact intensity beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L  causes a series of squishiness display states (including I-c) to be presented. The series of squishiness display states are intermediate display states between the augmented display state S 2  and a terminal display state S 3 . The series of squishiness display states are presented in an animation A 2 . Animation A 2  is a continuation of the animation A 1 . The user interface  138 G- 02  stays in the terminal display state S 3  when the contact intensity is above the tolerance intensity threshold IT T . When the contact intensity drops from the tolerance intensity threshold IT T  to the light press intensity threshold IT L  again, a reverse animation A 3  including the squishiness state I-c is presented. Since the intensity of the contact has previously reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , the user interface returns to the augmented display state S 2  and remains in the state S 2 , when the contact intensity drops below the light press intensity threshold IT L  and eventually to zero. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a subsequent increase in intensity of contact  138 G- 12  above IT L  followed by liftoff of contact  138 G- 12 , the device ceases to display the augmented display state S 2  and redisplays the initial display state S 1 . Additionally, in some embodiments, analogous operations are displayed with the deep press intensity threshold IT D  taking the place of the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  taking the place of the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (e.g., the initial display state is displayed until contact reaches intensity at IT L  and the augmented display state S 2  is displayed when contact reaches an intensity at IT D ). 
     FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 21  illustrate a process to use a gesture to highlight a particular portion of a slide shown in a presentation mode. Particularly, FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 12  illustrate that, in some embodiments, before the intensity of the contact reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , a spotlight highlights a portion of the slide to a moderate amount in accordance with the magnitude of the currently detected contact intensity. The spotlight is removed when the gesture is terminated. FIGS.  5 H 13 - 5 H 21  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays the slide in an augmented display state in which the spotlight highlights a portion of the slide to an enhanced degree. The device also maintains the slide in the augmented display state even after the contact intensity drops below the light press intensity threshold IT L . In the examples described in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 21 , the contact of the gesture can be moved to different locations on a touch-sensitive surface  451  separate from a display  450 , such that the spotlight moves to highlight different portions of the slide accordingly. FIGS.  5 H 13 - 5 H 21  also illustrates some squishiness display states displayed when the contact intensity reaches above the light press intensity threshold IT L . The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described in this specification, including the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6M . 
     In FIG.  5 H 1 , a user interface  138 H- 02  is provided on a display  450 , and shows a window of a presentation application in an editing mode. The window contains a slide  138 H- 05 . Separate from the display  450  is a touch-sensitive surface  451  coupled to the display  450 . Movement of a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface  451  can cause a focus selector (e.g., cursor  138 H- 09 ) to move from location to location on the user interface shown in the display  450  accordingly. 
     When the device detects that a contact  138 H- 07  on the touch-sensitive surface  451  is directed to the user interface element  138 H- 05  for selecting the presentation mode for the application, and its contact intensity exceeds the light press intensity threshold IT L  (or optionally upon a reduction in intensity of contact  138 H- 07  below IT L  or a hysteresis intensity threshold associated with IT L  or in response to liftoff of contact  138 H- 07 ), the device responds by changing the user interface  138 H- 02  from the editing mode shown in FIG.  5 H 1  to the presentation mode shown in  138 H 2 . 
     As shown in FIG.  5 H 2 , the user interface  138 H- 02  shows the slide  138 H- 05  in the presentation mode (e.g., shown in full-screen mode). When in the full-screen mode, the cursor  138 H- 09  is no longer displayed on the user interface  138 H- 02 . As shown in FIG.  5 H 2 , the slide  138 H- 05  contains various components (e.g., text components  138 H- 04   a  through  138 H- 04   c , and image components  138 H- 04   d  through  138 H- 04   g ) in their respective positions. FIG.  5 H 2  also shows that the previous gesture has been terminated, and no new gesture has yet been received on the touch-sensitive surface  451 . The user interface  138 H- 02  is in its initial display state S 1  before the next gesture is detected. 
     FIG.  5 H 3  illustrates that, in some embodiments, a new gesture performed with a contact  138 H- 08  is detected on the touch-sensitive surface  451 . In response to detecting the contact  138 H- 08 , the device displays a small spotlight  138 H- 06  on the user interface  138 H- 02  in accordance with the initial contact intensity of the new gesture. In some embodiments, the device selects an unoccupied location on the slide  138 H- 05  to display the spotlight  138 H- 06 . If the intensity of the contact  138 H- 08  increases while the contact  138 H- 08  is maintained at the same location on the touch-sensitive surface, the size and/or brightness of the spotlight optionally increase according to the increased contact intensity. In some embodiments, the spotlight  138 H- 06  also serves as a focus selector for the user interface  138 H- 02  in the presentation mode. 
     FIG.  5 H 4  shows that the contact  138 H- 08  has moved from its initial location on the touch-sensitive surface  451  to a new location. In response, the device moves the spotlight  138 H- 06  from its original location to a new location on the user interface  138 H- 02 . The new location of the spotlight  138 H- 06  on the user interface  138 H- 02  corresponds to the new location of the contact  138 H- 08  on the touch-sensitive surface  451 . As shown in FIG.  5 H 4 , the spotlight  138 H- 06  has moved over the text component  138 H- 04   c . In addition, the intensity of the contact  138 H- 08  has also increased from its initial value. In response to the increased contact intensity, the device increases the size and/or brightness of the spotlight  138 H- 06  according to the magnitude of the currently detected contact intensity. At its present size, the spotlight enhances the portion of the text component  138 H- 04   c  within the spotlight  138 H- 06  without enhancing other portions of the text component that are not within spotlight  138 H- 06 . 
     FIG.  5 H 5  shows that, in some embodiments, as the intensity of the contact over the text component  138 H- 04   c  continues to increase, the size and/or brightness of the spotlight over the text component  138 H- 04   c  also continues to increase. As a result, the text component  138 H- 04   c  is visually emphasized to an increasingly greater degree. 
     FIG.  5 H 6  shows that, the contact  138 H- 08  is moved to yet another location on the touch-sensitive surface  451 , and as a result, the spotlight  138 H- 06  moves to a location over a different text component  138 H- 04   b . The intensity of the contact  138 H- 08  has not changed from its previous value after this move. Therefore, the spotlight  138 H- 06  has the same size and/or brightness as previously shown in FIG.  5 H 5 . 
     FIG.  5 H 7  shows that, the spotlight  138 H- 06  has moved from its location over the text component  138 H- 04   b  to a new location over the image component  138 H- 04   g , in accordance with the movement of the contact  138 H- 08  on the touch-sensitive surface  451 . During the movement of the contact  138 H- 08 , the contact intensity has also been reduced. As shown in FIG.  5 H 7 , the spotlight  138 H- 06  highlights the image component  138 H- 04   g  to a less degree as that shown in FIGS.  5 H 5  and  5 H 6 . The size and/or brightness of the spotlight  138 H- 06  has been reduced according to the reduction of the contact intensity. 
     FIG.  5 H 7  also shows that, in some embodiments, when the size of the spotlight  138 H- 06  is big enough to include the entire object under the spotlight  138 H- 06 , the device presents the object in the spotlight  138 H- 06  as if it is floating above the surface of the slide  138 H- 05 . For example, as shown in FIG.  5 H 7 , the image  138 H- 04   g  fits entirely within the spotlight  138 H- 06 , and appears to be lifted off of the surface of the slide  138 H- 05  away from the other images on the slide  138 H- 05 . In some embodiments, the device also shows the image rotating slowly within the spotlight  138 H- 06 . 
     FIG.  5 H 8  shows that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact  138 H- 08  continues to increase toward the light press contact intensity IT L , the spotlight  138 H- 06  further highlights and enhances the appearance of the image  138 H- 04   g  to an increasing degree. In some embodiments, the device changes various characteristics (e.g., saturation, opacity, color, hue, border width, etc.) of the image itself to visually enhance it further. In some embodiments, the size of the spotlight  138 H- 06  is maintained after it has reached a predetermined maximum size, and the spotlight  138 H- 06  continues to increase the level of visual enhancement for the object under the spotlight  138 H- 06  through other means, such as color, hue, brightness, animation effects, etc, before the light press intensity threshold IT L  is reached. 
     FIGS.  5 H 9 - 5 H 10  show that when the intensity of the contact  138 H- 08  subsequently drops close to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , the spotlight  138 H- 06  diminishes in size and brightness, and the image component  138 H- 04   g  under the spotlight is only minimally highlighted by the spotlight. When the contact intensity is at the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , the spotlight  138 H- 06  returns to its initial size and brightness as shown in FIG.  5 H 3 . 
     FIG.  5 H 11  shows that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and eventually to zero, the device removes the spotlight  138 H- 06  from the user interface  138 H- 02 , and returns the user interface  138 H- 02  to its initial display state S 1  previously shown in FIG.  5 H 2 . 
     FIG.  5 H 12  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 H- 08  (as indicated by the solid line  138 H- 10 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface  138 H- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing the plurality of components  138 H- 04   a  through  138 H- 04   g  un-highlighted. I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-d, I-f, I-g, and I-h are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing different levels of moderate visual enhancement for the component(s) currently under the focus of the contact  138 H- 08 . The intermediate display states are presented in an animation A 1 . The animation A 1  shows the continued change in the amount of visual enhancement provided to the component(s) in accordance with the currently detected contact intensity. In addition, the animation A 1  also shows the movement of the spotlight on the user interface  138 H- 02  in accordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface  451 . In this scenario, the intensity of the contact  138 H- 08  never reached the light press intensity threshold IT L . Therefore, the user interface  138 H- 02  eventually returns to the initial display state S 1  once the contact intensity drops below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and eventually to zero. 
     FIGS.  5 G 13 - 5 G 21  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the contact intensity does exceed the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device displays and maintains the user interface  138 H- 02  in an augmented display state S 2  after the end-of-gesture is detected. In the augmented display state S 2 , the spotlight  138 H- 06  is maintained on the object or a portion thereof that is currently under the spotlight  138 H- 06 . In addition, the spotlight  138 H- 06  visually emphasizes the object or the portion thereof to a greater degree than previously shown in the intermediate display states (e.g., during the preview of the augmented display state S 2 ). 
     As shown in FIG.  5 H 13 , when a contact  138 H- 12  of a gesture is detected at a location of the touch-sensitive surface  451  corresponding to the image component  138 H- 04   g  in the slide  138 H- 05 , a spotlight  138 H- 06  is shone on the image component  138 H- 04   g . Since the initial size of the spotlight is small, only a portion of the image component  138 H- 04   g  is within the spotlight  138 H- 06 . The spotlight  138 H- 06  visually enhances the portion of the image component  138 H- 04   g  to a moderate degree. 
     FIGS.  5 H 14 - 5 H 15  illustrate that, in some embodiments, as the intensity of the contact gradually increases in a range between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L , the spotlight  138 H- 06  grows in size and brightness and visually enhances the image component  138 H- 04   g  to an increasing degree. When the spotlight  138 H- 04   g  grows to a size that encompasses the image component  138 H- 04   g , the device visually lifts the image component  138 H- 04   g  up from the surface of the slide  138 H- 05 . In some embodiments, in response to the increasing contact intensity, the image component  138 H- 04   g  also grows in size within the spotlight  138 H- 06 . In some embodiments, various other visual enhancement techniques (e.g., color variations, magnification, animation effects, bolded outlines, etc.) are also used to visually enhance the image component  138 H- 04   g.    
     In FIG.  5 H 16 , when the contact intensity finally reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the spotlight  138 H- 06  reaches its maximum size and brightness as well. In addition, the image component  138 H- 04   g  under the spotlight  138 H- 06  is enlarged and visually emphasized to a greater degree than that shown in any of the intermediate display states displayed before the contact intensity reached the light press intensity threshold IT L . When the contact intensity has reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , the user interface  138 H- 02  has entered the augmented display state S 2 . If the gesture were to terminate at this moment, the user interface  138 H- 02  would remain in the augmented display state S 2  shown in FIG.  5 H 17 . 
     FIG.  5 H 17  illustrates that, in some embodiments, one or more squishiness display states are displayed if the intensity of the contact continues to increase beyond the light press intensity threshold IT L . In the squishiness display states, the size of the spotlight  138 H- 06  changes (e.g., increases and decreases) synchronously with the changes (e.g., increases and decreases) in the contact intensity above the light press intensity threshold IT L . In some embodiments, the size of the image component  138 H- 04   g  within the spotlight  138 H- 06  also changes with the size of the spotlight  138 H- 06 . However, in some embodiments, the image component  138 H- 04   g  is not visually enhanced through other means in the squishiness display states. 
     FIGS.  5 H 18 - 5 H 20  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact subsequently drops below the light press intensity threshold IT L  (as shown in FIG.  5 H 18 ), below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 H 19 ), and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 H 20 ), the device redisplays the augmented display state S 2  and maintains the user interface  138 H- 02  in the augmented display state S 2  (previously shown in FIG.  5 H 16 ). 
     FIG.  5 H 21  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 H- 12  (as indicated by the solid line  138 H- 14 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the user interface  138 H- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing un-highlighted components  138 H- 04   a  through  138 H- 04   g  in a slide  138 H- 05  in the presentation mode. I-a, I-e, and I-f are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing gradually increased highlighting (and other visual enhancements) of the component(s) or portion(s) thereof currently under focus. S 2  is the augmented display state in which the component(s) currently under focus is visually enhanced to a greater extent than that in any of the intermediate display states previously shown. I-i is a representative of a series of squishiness display states shown when the contact intensity increases above the light press intensity threshold IT L . In the squishiness display states, the user interface  138 H- 02  (e.g., the spotlight  138 H- 06  and/or the component(s) under focus) are altered further from that shown in the augmented display state S 2 . The transition from the initial display state S 1  to the augmented display state S 2  is presented in an animation A 1 . The squishiness display states are shown in an animation A 2 . The animation A 2  is a continuation of the animation A 1  leading to the augmented display state S 2 . Since the intensity of the contact does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L  before the end-of-gesture is detected, the user interface  138 H- 02  returns to the augmented display state S 2  and remains in S 2  after the contact intensity drops below the light press intensity threshold IT L . In some embodiments, in response to detecting a subsequent increase in intensity of contact  138 H- 12  above IT L  followed by liftoff of contact  138 H- 12 , the device ceases to display the augmented display state S 2  and redisplays the initial display state S 1 . Additionally, in some embodiments, analogous operations are displayed with the deep press intensity threshold IT D  taking the place of the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  taking the place of the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (e.g., the initial display state is displayed until contact reaches intensity at IT L  and the augmented display state S 2  is displayed when contact reaches an intensity at IT D ). 
     FIGS.  5 I 1 - 5 I 16  illustrate visual feedback provided in response to a gesture directed to activating a “new tab” element  138 I- 04  in a browser window  138 I- 02 . Particularly, FIGS.  5 I 1 - 5 I 8  illustrate that, in some embodiments, before the intensity of the contact reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device presents a preview of the generation of a new tab in the browser window  138 I- 02 . In some embodiments, generation of a new tab includes generating a new tabbed window in a tabbed document interface (e.g., the web browser window  138 I- 02 ). FIGS.  5 I 9 - 5 I 16  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device completes the generation of the new tab and displays it in the browser window  138 I- 02 . Once the new tab is generated, in this example, the new tab remains in the browser window  138 I- 02 . The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described in this specification, including the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6M . 
     FIG.  5 I 1  illustrates a browser window  138 I- 02  containing a “new tab” element  138 I- 04 . The function of the “new tab” element  138 I- 04  is to generate a new tab for a webpage in the browser window  138 I- 02 . In some browser windows, clicking or tapping on the “new tab” element would cause a new tab to be generated and presented in the browser window. As shown in FIG.  5 I 1 , the “new tab” element  138 I- 04  is presented next to an existing tab  138 I- 06  for a currently open webpage (e.g., a search engine homepage). Before the gesture including contact  138 I- 08  is detected on the touch screen  112 , the browser window  138 I- 02  is in its initial display state S 1 , as shown in FIG.  5 I 1 . 
     FIG.  5 I 2  shows that, in some embodiments, when a gesture is detected on the touch screen  112 , and a contact  138 I- 08  of the gesture is over the “new tab” element  138 I- 04  in the browser window  138 I- 02 , the device highlights the “new tab” element  138 I- 04  to indicate selection of the “new tab” element  138 I- 04 . 
     FIGS.  5 I 3 - 5 I 4  illustrate that, in some embodiments, as the intensity of the contact increases in a range between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L , a new tab  138 I- 10  gradually emerges from behind the existing tab  138 I- 06  and expands toward the right side of the browser window  138 I- 02 . In addition, the emerging new tab  138 I- 10  pushes the “new tab” element  138 I- 04  to the right as the new tab  138 I- 10  expands toward the right side of the window  138 I- 02 . The amount of expansion  138 I- 10  undertaken by the new tab  138 I- 10  is based on how closely the currently detected contact intensity approaches the light press intensity threshold IT L . 
     FIG.  5 I 5  illustrates that, in some embodiments, before the intensity of the contact ever reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , if the contact intensity decreases in the range between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L , the new tab  138 I- 10  gradually retracts back behind the existing tab  138 I- 06 . In addition, the “new tab” element  138 I- 04  also retracts toward the left side of the window along with the new tab  138 I- 10 . 
     FIGS.  5 I 6 - 5 I 7  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact continues to drop below the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 I 6 ), and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 I 7 ), the device returns the browser window  138 I- 02  to its initial display state S 1  in which the new tab  138 I- 10  is completely retracted behind the existing tab  138 I- 06 , and the “new tab” element  138 I- 04  is restored to its original position next to the existing tab  138 I- 06 . Thus, in some embodiments, a preview of the new tab  138 I- 10  that would be generated has been provided in response to the initial portion of gesture, however, since the intensity of the contact never reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , the new tab is not fully generated and does not remain in the browser window  138 I- 02  when the gesture is terminated (e.g., the device forgoes generating a new tabbed window in the browser window  138 I- 02 ). 
     FIG.  5 I 8  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 I- 08  (as indicated by the solid line  138 I- 14 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the window  138 I- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing an existing tab and an unselected “new tab” element  138 I- 04 . S 1 ′ is a modified initial state indicating selection of the “new tab” element  138 I- 04 . I-a and I-b are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing the new tab  138 I- 10  gradually emerging from behind the existing tab in response to increasing intensity of the contact, and gradually retracting behind the existing tab in response decreasing intensity of the contact. In this scenario, the contact intensity never reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L . As a result, the generation of the new tab  138 I- 10  is not completed and the browser window  138 I- 02  returns to the initial display state S 1  when the end of the gesture is detected. The series of intermediate display states are shown in an animation A 1  linking the initial display state S 1  to an augmented display state S 2  described below with reference to FIGS.  5 I 9 - 5 I 16 , but which is not reached in FIGS.  5 I 1 - 5 I 7 . 
     FIGS.  5 I 9 - 5 I 16  illustrate an alternative scenario to that shown in FIGS.  5 I 1 - 5 I 7 . In the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 I 9 - 5 I 16 , the intensity of the contact does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L , and the new tab  138 I- 10  is completely generated after a preview of the new tab  138 I- 10  has been shown. After the new tab  138 I- 10  is completely generated, it remains in the browser window  138 I- 02  even after the end of gesture is detected (e.g., the device generates a new tabbed window in the browser window  138 I- 02 ). 
     FIGS.  5 I 9 - 5 I 12  illustrate that, in some embodiments, when a gesture (with a contact  138 I- 16 ) is detected on the “new tab” element  138 I- 04 , and the intensity of the contact increases in the range between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L , the device shows a new tab  138 I- 10  gradually emerging from behind the existing tab  138 I- 06  and extending toward the right side of the browser window  138 I- 02 . As the new tab  138 I- 10  gradually emerges, the new tab  138 I- 10  pushes the “new tab” element  138 I- 04  toward the right side of the window as well. This is the same behavior as previously shown in FIGS.  5 I 1 - 5 I 4 . 
     FIG.  5 I 13  illustrates that, in some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact reaches the light press intensity threshold IT L , the new tab  138 I- 10  is completed generated, and emerges fully from behind the existing tab  138 I- 06 . The new tab  138 I- 10  (or the new tabbed window associated with the new tab) replaces the existing tab as the currently active tab of the browser window  138 I- 02 . The content of the new tab  138 I- 10  (e.g., “my home page”) is brought to the foreground of the window  138 I- 02 , and covers the content of the existing tab  138 I- 06  (e.g., the “search engine homepage”). FIG.  5 I 13  shows the augmented display state of the browser window  138 I- 02 . 
     FIGS.  5 I 14 - 5 I 15  illustrate that, in some embodiments, once the contact intensity has reached the light press intensity threshold IT L , the generation of the new tab  138 I- 10  is fully completed, and the new tab  138 I- 10  remains in the browser window  138 I- 02  even after the intensity of the contact drops to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (as shown in FIG.  5 I 14 ) and eventually to zero (as shown in FIG.  5 I 15 ). 
     FIG.  5 I 16  is a diagram illustrating the changes in the intensity of the contact  138 I- 16  (as indicated by the solid line  138 I- 18 ), and the corresponding changes in the display states of the window  138 I- 02  over time. S 1  represents the initial display state showing an existing tab and an unselected “new tab” element  138 I- 04 . S 1 ′ is a modified initial state indicating selection of the “new tab” element  138 I- 04 . I-a and I-b are representatives of a series of intermediate display states showing a new tab  138 I- 10  gradually emerging from behind the existing tab in response to increasing intensity of the contact. In this scenario, the contact intensity does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L , and the generation of the new tab  138 I- 10  is completed upon the contact intensity reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L . S 2  represents the augmented display state showing the completely generated new tab  138 I- 10 . The browser window  138 I- 02  remains in the augmented display state S 2  even when the contact intensity subsequently drops to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and eventually to zero. The series of intermediate display states are shown in an animation A 1  linking the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting a subsequent increase in intensity of contact  138 I- 16  above IT L  followed by liftoff of contact  138 I- 16 , the device ceases to display the augmented display state S 2  and redisplays the initial display state S 1 . Additionally, in some embodiments, analogous operations are displayed with the deep press intensity threshold IT D  taking the place of the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  taking the place of the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  (e.g., the initial display state is displayed until contact reaches intensity at IT L  and the augmented display state S 2  is displayed when contact reaches an intensity at IT D ). 
       FIGS. 6A-6G  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  13900  in accordance with some embodiments. The method  13900  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a plurality of intensity levels (e.g., the sensors detects variations in intensity and not just binary (“on”/“off”) intensity). Some operations in method  13900  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  13900  provides an intuitive way to provide feedback to a user in response to a gesture invoking a user interface element. Specifically, when the intensity of the contact does not reach a predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L  or IT D ), the device only provides a preview of an augmented display state that would be caused by continued increase of the contact intensity to the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L  or IT D ). Alternatively, if the contact intensity does reach the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L  or IT D ), the device, after having presented the preview of the augmented display state, presents and maintains the augmented display state on the display even after the end-of-gesture is detected. The method  13900  allows the user to preview the effect of the gesture (e.g., a pressing gesture) with a press input that has a maximum intensity below the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L  or IT D ), and terminate the gesture before committing to that effect, or alternatively, to commit to that effect by providing the required contact intensity before terminating the gesture. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when operating a user interface element, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to achieve a desired outcome using a user interface element faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     In the method  13900 , the device displays ( 13902 ) a user interface on a display, where the user interface is in a first display state. The device detects ( 13904 ) a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface of the device, including detecting intensity of a respective contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, the device detects the contact when the intensity of the contact reaches to and above the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 . 
     In response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, the device displays ( 13906 ) an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state. In some embodiments, the first display state is a steady display state (e.g., the display state S 1  described above with reference to  FIGS. 5A-5I  and shown in FIGS.  5 A 1 ,  5 A 10 ,  5 B 1 ,  5 C 1 ,  5 C 9 ,  5 D 1 ,  5 D 9 ,  5 D 17 ,  5 E 1 ,  5 E 9 ,  5 F 1 ,  5 F 11 ,  5 G 1 ,  5 G 7 ,  5 H 1 ,  5 H 13 ,  5 I 1  and  5 I 9 ) of the user interface that the device is operable to maintain without requiring any input from a gesture. In some embodiments, the second display state is another steady display state (e.g., the display state S 2  described above with reference to  FIGS. 5A-5I  and shown in FIGS.  5 A 14 ,  5 B 4 ,  5 C 13 ,  5 C 20 ,  5 D 13 ,  5 D 21 ,  5 D 29 ,  5 D 33 ,  5 E 12 ,  5 E 9 ,  5 F 15 ,  5 G 10 ,  5 H 16 , and  5 I 13 ) of the user interface that the device is operable to maintain without requiring any input from a gesture. In some embodiments, the first display state represents the state of the user interface before an operation is performed, and the second display state represents a modified state of the user interface after the operation has been performed. In some embodiments, the device implements multiple steady display states, including an initial display state S 1 , a first augmented display state S 2 , and a second augmented display state S 3 . In some of such embodiments, the first display state is the first augmented display state S 2  (e.g., the display state S 2  shown in FIGS.  5 C 20  and  5 D 33 ), and the second display state is the second augmented display state S 3  (e.g., the display state S 3  shown in FIGS.  5 C 24  and  5 D 38 ). 
     In some embodiments, the intermediate display state between the first display state and the second display state represent a transition from the first display state and the second display state. In some embodiments, the intermediate display state is selected ( 13908 ) in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact of the gesture (e.g., the current intermediate display state corresponds to a current intensity of the respective contact). For example, when a series of intermediate display states are used to represent the gradual transition from the first display state and the second display state, the device selects the intermediate display state for display based on where the currently detected contact intensity is within the range between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L . In some embodiments, there are multiple intermediate display states between the first display state and the second display state, (e.g., the intermediate display states I-a, I-b, I-c, etc. shown  FIGS. 5A-5I ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, the device displays ( 13910 ) a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state, where a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact, (e.g., the intermediate display states I-a and I-b described above with reference to  FIGS. 5A-5I ). Examples of intermediate display states are shown in FIGS.  5 A 3 - 5 A 5 ,  5 A 12 - 5 A 13 ,  5 C 3 - 5 C 5 ,  5 C 11 - 5 C 12 ,  5 C 22 - 5 C 23 ,  5 D 3 -D 5 ,  5 D 11 - 5 D 12 ,  5 D 19 - 5 D 20 ,  5 D 27 - 5 D 28 ,  5 D 35 - 5 D 36 ,  5 E 3 - 5 E 5 ,  5 F 3 - 5 F 7 ,  5 F 13 - 5 F 14 ,  5 G 2 - 5 G 4 ,  5 G 8 - 5 G 9 ,  5 H 4 - 5 H 9 ,  5 H 14 - 5 H 15 ,  5 I 3 - 5 I 5 , and  5 I 11 - 5 I 12 . In some embodiments, the device also takes into account of the movement of the contact when selecting the intermediate display state, (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 3 - 5 H 8 ). 
     In some embodiments, the device generates ( 13912 ) an animated transition (e.g., a continuous animation) between the first display state and the second display state, where the animated transition includes the intermediate display state and the intermediate display state is mapped to an intensity of the contact detected at an end of the first portion of the gesture. In response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, display a portion of the animated transition between the first display state and the intermediate display state (e.g., the device advances through the previously generated animation to a point that corresponds to a current intensity of the contact). 
     For example, in some embodiments, when the first portion of the gesture is an initial press input provided by a user, and the contact intensity of the press input monotonically increases from the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 to a value below the light press intensity threshold IT L , the intermediate display state displayed at the end of the press input is selected based on where the maximum contact intensity of the press input is mapped to in a range between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L . This is illustrated, for example, by the diagrams in FIGS.  5 A 18 ,  5 C 16 ,  5 D 16 ,  5 D 32 ,  5 E 16 ,  5 F 22 ,  5 G 18 ,  5 H 21 , and  5 I 16 , and associated user interface figures. In each of these diagrams, an animation A 1  between the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2  is an example animated transition between the first display state and the second display state. In each of these diagrams, an example intermediate display state is an intermediate state (e.g., I-a or I-b) shown between S 1  and S 2 , and an example first portion of the gesture is a portion of the gesture that ended at a point corresponding to the intermediate display state (e.g., I-a or I-b) along the solid intensity curve shown in these figures. Accordingly, the portion of the animated transition that is displayed by the device is the portion of A 1  between the intermediated state (e.g., I-a or I-b) and S 2  in these figures. In some embodiments, the mapping between the contact intensity and the animated transition is linear. In some embodiments, the mapping between the contact intensity and the animated transition is non-linear (e.g., a larger amount of change in contact intensity is required for each given amount of change in the animated transition, as the value of the contact intensity increases). 
     In some embodiments, detecting the first portion of the gesture includes ( 13914 ) detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact from a first intensity threshold (e.g., an “animation-initiation” or “operation preview” threshold such as zero force, a nominal force, or the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 ) to an intermediate intensity threshold (e.g., an intensity threshold that is between the first intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold IT L ). After displaying the intermediate display state: the device detects a second portion of the gesture, where the second portion of the gesture includes detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact from the intermediate intensity threshold to the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., an “activation” or “operation execution” intensity threshold associated with performing an operation corresponding to the second display state); and in response to detecting the second portion of the gesture, the device displays an animated transition between the intermediate display state and the second display state. 
     For example, in some embodiments, a gesture that includes a initial portion that does not reach the light press intensity threshold IT L  and a later portion that does reach the light press intensity threshold IT L  would cause an operation associated with an invoked user interface element (e.g., a button) to be completed and thus cause the user interface to enter an augmented display state S 2  indicating completion of the operation. The initial portion of the gesture only causes a preview of the augmented display state S 2  to be presented because its intensity does not reach the light press intensity threshold IT L  required to complete the operation. In some embodiments, each intensity value between the “animation-initiation” or “operation preview” intensity threshold (e.g., zero or IT 0 ) and the “operation execution” intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) has a corresponding intermediate state between the initial display state S 1  and the augmented display state S 2  of the user interface. Therefore, an intermediate intensity between the “animation-initiation” or “operation preview” intensity threshold (e.g., zero or IT 0 ) and the “operation execution” intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) has a corresponding intermediate display state. This corresponding intermediate display state is the state displayed at the end of the first portion of the gesture. When the latter portion of the gesture is detected, and during the latter portion of the gesture, the contact intensity increases from the intermediate threshold to the light press intensity threshold IT L , intermediate states that correspond to intensity values between the intermediate intensity and the light press intensity threshold IT L  are now displayed according to the detected intensities. These later displayed intermediate states form the animated transition between the intermediate state (corresponding to the intermediate intensity) and the augmented display state S 2 . This is illustrated, for example, by the diagrams in FIGS.  5 A 18 ,  5 C 16 ,  5 D 16 ,  5 D 32 ,  5 E 16 ,  5 F 22 ,  5 G 18 ,  5 H 21 , and  5 I 16 , and associated user interface figures). In each of these diagrams, an example first portion of the gesture is the portion of the gesture leading to an intermediate display state (e.g., I-a or I-b) before the augmented display state S 2 . An example second portion of the gesture is the portion of the gesture that continues from the first point of the gesture to a point with an intensity above the light press intensity threshold IT L . Although these figures show that the first portion of the gesture and the second portion of the gesture are continuous portions of the same gesture. In some embodiments, the first portion of the gesture and the second portion of the gesture need not be continuous portions of the same gesture. For example, in some scenarios, the first portion and the second portion is separated by an intermediate portion that varies in a range between the intermediate intensity and the “animation-initiation” or “operation preview” intensity threshold (e.g., zero or IT 0 ). 
     In some embodiments, while the intensity of the respective contact is at or below the predefined intensity threshold, the device displays ( 13916 ) an animated transition from the first display state to the second display state, where the animated transition includes adjusting a parameter corresponding to a visual property of a set of one or more user interface objects in a predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. In addition, the device detects an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold, the device displays a continuation of the animated transition that includes adjusting the parameter in the predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact (e.g., an animation that continues along a trajectory shown in the animation of the transition between the first display state and the second display state). For example, if an icon was enlarged to a respective size during the animation between the first display state and the second display state, the supplemental display state shows the icon even larger than the respective size. In some embodiments, the parameter is ( 13918 ) a parameter selected from the set consisting of: user interface object size, user interface object opacity, space between user interface objects, and number of options displayed in a menu (e.g., a pop-up contextual menu or a drop-down menu from a menu bar). 
     For an example, as shown in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 7 , the device displays an animated transition to show the smiley&#39;s nose becoming increasingly opaque in response to increasing contact intensity reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L . When the device detects continued increase in the contact intensity, the device displays a continuation of the animated transition to show further increase in the opacity of the smiley&#39;s nose. 
     For another example, as shown in FIGS.  5 C 17 - 5 C 23 , the device displays an animated transition to illustrate the expansion of a drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′ from a first size including no menu items to a second size including a small number of menu items, in response to increasing contact intensity reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L . When the device detects continued increase in the contact intensity, the device displays a continuation of the animated transition to show further expansion of the drop-down menu (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 C 23 ) to include a greater number of menu items. 
     For another example, as shown in FIGS.  5 C 20 - 5 C 25 , the device displays an animated transition to illustrate the expansion of a drop-down menu  138 C- 06 ′ from a first size to a second size, in response to increasing contact intensity reaching the deep press intensity threshold IT D . When the device detects continued increase in the contact intensity, the device displays a continuation of the animated transition to show further expansion of the drop-down menu (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 C 25 ). 
     For another example, as shown in FIGS.  5 D 33 - 5 D 39 , the device displays an animated transition to illustrate rotation of the center component  138 D- 18  from its front side to its backside, in response to increasing contact intensity reaching the deep press intensity threshold IT D . When the device detects continued increase in the contact intensity, the device displays a continuation of the animated transition to show further rotation of the center component in the same direction (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 39 ). 
     For another example, as shown in FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 16 , the device displays an animated transition to illustrate a plurality of icons  138 F- 06   a  through  138 F- 06   d  flying out of a selected application icon  138 F- 04   d  along a trajectory into a predetermined configuration, in response to increasing contact intensity reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L . When the device detects continued increase in the contact intensity, the device displays further movement of the plurality of icons along their previous trajectory. 
     For another example, as shown in FIGS.  5 G 7 - 5 G 11 , the device displays an animation transition to illustrate a plurality of images  138 G- 04   a  through  138 G- 04   d  spreading out from an overlapping state to a non-overlapping state, in response to increasing contact intensity reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L . When the device detects continued increase in the contact intensity, the device displays a continuation of the animated transition to show further spreading out of the plurality of images. 
     The device detects ( 13920 ) an end of the gesture. In some embodiments, detecting the end of the gesture includes ( 13922 ) detecting liftoff of the respective contact. For example, in some embodiments, the end of the gesture is detected when the contact intensity drops to the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 . In some embodiments, detecting the end of the gesture includes ( 13924 ) detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact from above to below an end-of-gesture intensity threshold. For example, in some embodiments, the end-of-gesture is some other intensity value different from (e.g., greater than) the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , some other nominal value, or zero. In some embodiments, detecting the end of the gesture includes ( 13926 ) detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact below the predefined intensity threshold. For example, in some embodiments, the device detects the end of the gesture immediately when the intensity of the contact reaches the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., the light press intensity threshold IT L  or, alternatively, the deep press intensity threshold IT D ), regardless whether the contact of the gesture is maintained at a level above the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 . Sometime, the device implements this end-of-gesture criterion when no squishiness display states or further augmented display states exist for a particular user interface. Since there is no need to keep track of the contact intensity after the operation initiated by the gesture has been completed in response to the contact intensity reaching the predefined intensity threshold, the device treats the gesture as terminated at this point regardless of whether the contact of the gesture is removed. 
     In response to detecting the end of the gesture: (1) in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, the device displays ( 13928 ) the second display state; and (2) in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, the device terminates display of the intermediate display state and redisplays the first display state. This is illustrated in the overview shown in FIGS.  5 A 1  through  5 A 18  (e.g., FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 9  illustrate the first scenario, and FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 18  illustrate the second scenario). Various embodiments illustrating the different behaviors of the device in accordance with whether the contact intensity has reached the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., the light press intensity threshold IT L  or the deep press intensity threshold IT D ) are also shown in  FIGS. 5C through 5I . 
     In some embodiments, while detecting the gesture, the device detects ( 13930 ) an increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold. In response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold, the device generates a tactile output that indicates that the second display state will continue to be displayed after an end of the gesture is detected (e.g., the user feels a button “click” tactile sensation that includes that the second display state has been “locked in”). For example, the tactile output is a haptic feedback provided on the touch-sensitive surface of the device or a vibration of another part of the device that the user is touching. The tactile output will cause the user to have a sensation of a “click” or “tick” coming from the user interface element under the contact. In some embodiments, when the contact intensity increases beyond the predefined intensity threshold, and subsequently drops back to the predefined intensity threshold, another tactile output is also provided to indicate that the user interface has returned to the second display state and will remain in the second display state. The haptic feedback is described with respect to the examples shown in FIGS.  5 C 9 - 5 C 12 ,  5 C 17 - 5 C 32 , and  5 E 9 - 5 E 16 . However, it should be understood that the tactile output can be implemented in other embodiments as well when the press input meets or exceeds the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., the light press intensity threshold IT L  or the deep press intensity threshold IT D ). 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13931 ) displaying an icon that corresponds to a menu without displaying the menu (e.g., displaying an icon labeled “File,” which corresponds to a File menu, without displaying items in the File menu). Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the menu, where the preview of the menu is different from the menu. For example, the preview of the menu includes fewer options than the menu, the preview of the menu is more transparent than the menu, the preview of the menu is smaller than the menu, and/or the preview of the menu does not include selectable elements while the menu includes selectable elements. Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying the menu. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 32  and accompanying descriptions, with icons  138 C- 04 ,  138 C- 04 ′ and menus  138 C- 06 ,  138 C- 06 ′, respectively. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13932 ) displaying an icon that corresponds to a pop-up window without displaying the pop-up window. Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the pop-up window, where the preview of the pop-up window is different from the pop-up window (e.g., the preview of the pop-up window includes fewer options than the pop-up window, the preview of the pop-up window is more transparent than the pop-up window, the preview of the pop-up window is smaller than the pop-up window, and/or the preview of the pop-up window does not include selectable elements while the pop-up window includes selectable elements). Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying the pop-up window. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 16  and accompanying descriptions with icon  138 D- 04   a , pop-up window preview  138 D- 06  and pop-up window  138 D- 07 . 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13934 ) displaying an icon (e.g., a show/hide indicator such as a disclosure triangle) that corresponds to a hidden text without displaying the hidden text (e.g., displaying disclosure triangle  138 E- 04  in FIG.  5 E 1 , which corresponds to hidden text in a drop-down list  138 E- 06  in FIG.  5 E 12 , without displaying the hidden text). Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of the hidden text, where the preview of the hidden text is different from the hidden text. For example, the preview of the hidden text is more transparent than the hidden text, the preview of the hidden text is smaller than the hidden text, and/or the preview of the hidden text does not include selectable elements while the hidden text includes selectable elements. Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying the hidden text. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 E 1 - 5 E 16  and accompanying descriptions with icon  138 E- 04  as the icon, drop-down list preview  138 E- 06  as the preview of the hidden text, and drop down list  138 E- 07  as the hidden text. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13936 ) displaying an icon that corresponds to a plurality of user interface objects without displaying the plurality of user interface objects (e.g., displaying a folder icon for a folder that contains document/application icons, without displaying the document/application items). Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects, where the reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects are different from the user interface objects (e.g., the reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects include representations of only a subset of the user interface objects, the reduced-scale representation of the user interface objects are more transparent than the user interface objects, the reduced-scale representation of the user interface objects are smaller than the user interface objects, and/or the reduced-scale representation are not selectable elements while the user interface elements are selectable elements of the user interface). For example, the reduced scale representations of the user interface objects are small versions of the document/application icons in a folder. Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying the user interface objects (e.g., displaying an array of document/application icons). This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 F 1 - 522  and accompanying descriptions with icon  139 F- 04  as the icon, preview icons  138 F- 06  as the reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects, and selectable document icons  138 F- 07  as the user interface objects. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13938 ) displaying an image prior to applying a graphical effect to the image; (e.g., an image filter). Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of partially applying the graphical effect to the image (e.g., displaying contrast of an image increased by half a step. Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying the image with the graphical effect applied (e.g., displaying contrast of the image increased by a full step). 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13940 ) displaying a representation of an album (e.g., cover art of a music album or photo album). Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of components (e.g., tracks within a music album, or thumbnails of images in a photo album) of the album, where the preview of components of the album is different from the components of the album. For example, in some embodiments, the preview of the components of the album is more transparent than the components of the album. In some embodiments, the preview of the components of the album is smaller than the components of the album. In some embodiments, the preview of the components of the album does not include selectable elements while the components of the album include selectable elements. In some embodiments, the preview of the components of the album is rotated so that the components are not easily viewable, while the components are easily viewable in the second display state. For example, a music album cover slowly flips around to reveal tracks on the “back” of the album or a photo album cover slowly flips around to reveal thumbnails of images in the photo album. Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying the components of the album. These are illustrated by various embodiments shown in FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 16 ,  5 D 17 - 5 D 24 ,  5 D 25 - 5 D 32 , and  5 D 33 - 5 D 42  and accompanying descriptions, with object  138 D- 04   a ″ as the album, object preview  138 D- 24  as the preview of components of the album and object  138 D- 25  as the representation of the album. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13942 ) displaying a plurality of user interface objects arranged on the display such that at least some objects overlap each other. Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying the user interface objects spread apart so that at least two of the plurality of user interface objects that formerly overlapped with each other do not overlap with each other while at least two the plurality of user interface objects overlap each other (e.g., the user interface objects spread apart and shrink in size so that they can be simultaneously displayed in a non-overlapping arrangement on the display). Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying the plurality of user interface objects so that they do not overlap with each other. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 18  and accompanying descriptions with user interface objects  138 G- 04  as the user interface objects that at least partly overlap each other. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13944 ) displaying an image (e.g., a slide in a full-screen mode, or an image or text component within a slide) in a presentation without emphasis. Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying preliminary emphasis on a portion of the image (e.g., displaying low contrast highlighting or a slight increase in brightness of a respective region of the user interface that includes the image). Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying the image with additional emphasis on the portion of the image (e.g., displaying high contrast highlighting or a significant increase in brightness of a respective region of the user interface that includes the image). This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 21  and accompanying descriptions with slide  138 H- 05  initially displayed without emphasis, and object  138 H- 04   g  initially displayed without emphasis, then with preliminary emphasis and then with additional emphasis. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13946 ) displaying a current state of an electronic document. Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a beginning portion of an undo operation. For example, in some embodiments, displaying the beginning of an undo operation includes displaying a word that is being deleted partially faded out, displaying an image that is being resized at an intermediate size between the current size and the prior size, or displaying a word that is being replaced by another word as a superposition of the two words. Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying a prior state of the document after the undo operation has been performed. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13948 ) displaying a current state of an electronic document. Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a first prior state of the electronic document after a first undo operation has been performed. For example, when a plurality of words have been added, displaying the first prior state of the electronic document includes ceasing to display a most recently added word. Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying a second prior state (prior to the first prior state) of the electronic document after a second undo operation has been performed. For example, when a plurality of words have been added, displaying the second prior state of the electronic document includes ceasing to display a second most recently added word. Thus, in some embodiments, a user can press harder on an undo affordance to undo operations further back in the undo order using a single press input, where the number of steps back into the undo order is determined by the intensity of the press input. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the user interface in the first display state includes ( 13949 ) displaying one or more tabs in a tabbed document interface (e.g., a browser window containing tabs for different web pages, or a document editing application containing tabs for different open documents). In some embodiments, the tabs are arranged in a linear fashion in the interface, either visibly contained in a linear tab bar or arranged in a single row. In some embodiments, the tabs are arranged in multiple rows or contained in multiple tab bars, if one row or tab bar is not sufficient to accommodate all tabs in the tabbed document interface. Displaying the user interface in the intermediate display state includes displaying a preview of a new tab in the tabbed document interface (e.g., displaying a portion of the new tab appearing on the tab bar from underneath other tabs, or gradually appearing from a bottom or top of the tab bar). Displaying the user interface in the second display state includes displaying the new tab in the tabbed document interface. For example, in some embodiments (e.g., where the gesture includes a press input on a new-tab affordance), the new tab springs out from under other tabs in the tab bar and slides back under the other tabs if the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 I 1 - 5 I 16  and accompanying descriptions. FIGS.  5 I 1 - 5 I 16  shows the new tab  138 I- 10  emerging from behind the existing tab  138 I- 06  toward the right side of the browser window  138 I- 02 . However, in some embodiments, the new tab emerges and/or springs out from above or below the existing tab next to a new tab affordance, and gradually settles into its final position along a predetermined path when the contact intensity increases to the predefined intensity threshold. If the contact intensity reduces before it reaches the predefined intensity threshold, the new tab springs back to behind the existing tab along its original path, or fades out gradually. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 6A-6G  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  13900  described above with respect to  FIGS. 6A-6G . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described above with reference to method  13900  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein. For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
       FIGS. 6H-6M  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  13950  in accordance with some embodiments. The method  13950  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  13950  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  13950  provides an intuitive way to provide feedback to a user in response to a gesture invoking a user interface element. Specifically, after displaying a first animation showing a transition from a first display state to a second display state in response to detecting an increasing in intensity of contact, the device displays, in response to detecting a further increasing in intensity of the contact, a second animation that is a continuation of the first animation. The method  13950  provides visual feedback in response to a later portion of a gesture after performance of an operation has been completed (e.g., as indicated by a transition from a first display state to a second display state) in response to an earlier portion of the gesture. The visual feedback provided for a sustained contact after the “operation-execution” portion of the gesture has been completed is more natural and intuitive to the user and provides visual interest on the user interface. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when operating a user interface element, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to achieve a desired outcome using a user interface element faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     In the method  13950 , the device displays ( 13952 ) a user interface on a display, where the user interface is in a first display state. The device detects ( 13954 ) a first input, including detecting an increase in intensity of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on a touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the first input, the device displays ( 13956 ) a first animation of the user interface transitioning from the first display state to a second display state (e.g., a transition from state S 1  to state S 2 , as shown in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 4 ,  5 C 17 - 20 ,  5 C 23 - 5 C 24 ,  5 D 17 - 5 D 21 ,  5 D 33 - 5 D 38 ,  5 F 11 - 5 F 15 ,  5 G 7 - 5 G 10 , and  5 H 13 - 5 H 16 ), wherein a rate of change from the first display state to the second display state is determined in accordance with an intensity of the contact included in the first input (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 B 16 ,  5 C 32 ,  5 D 24 ,  5 D 42 ,  5 F 22 ,  5 G 18 , and  5 H 21 ). 
     After the user interface has transitioned ( 13958 ) to the second display state: the device performs operations  13960 - 666 . The device detects ( 13960 ) a second input that includes detecting an increase in intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the second input, the device displays ( 13962 ) a second animation of the user interface transitioning from the second display state to a third display state, where the second animation is a continuation of the first animation and the third display state is determined in accordance with the intensity of the contact included in the second input on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a state corresponding to an intensity greater than the intensity associated with state S 2  or, alternatively state S 3 , as shown in FIGS.  5 B 4 - 5 B 6 ,  5 B 16 ,  5 C 22 - 23 ,  5 C 25 - 5 C 26 ,  5 C 32 ,  5 D 33 - 5 D 37 ,  5 D 38 - 5 D 39 ,  5 D 42 ,  5 F 15 - 5 F 17 ,  5 F 22 ,  5 G 10 - 5 G 12 ,  5 G 18 ,  5 H 16 - 5 H 17 , and  5 H 21 ). The device detects ( 13964 ) a reduction in the intensity of the contact included in the second input. For example, the reduction is a reduction in intensity or lift of the respective contact. In response to detecting the reduction in the intensity of the contact included in the second input, the device displays ( 13966 ) a third animation of the user interface transitioning from the third display state to the second display state. For example, after detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact included in the second input (e.g., to an intensity greater than the intensity associated with state S 2  or, alternatively state S 3 ), the user interface “springs back” to the second display state (e.g., state S 2  or, alternatively state S 3 ). This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 14 ,  5 B 16 ,  5 C 25 - 5 C 26 ,  5 C 27 - 5 C 31 ,  5 C 32 ,  5 D 39 - 5 D 41 ,  5 D 42 ,  5 F 17 - 5 F 21 ,  5 F 22 ,  5 G 14 - 17 ,  5 G 18 ,  5 H 17 - 5 H 20 , and  5 H 21 , and accompanying descriptions. 
     In some embodiments, the first input and the second input are ( 13968 ) part of single gesture that includes a continuously detected contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, the initial portion of the gesture (e.g., a light press with a maximum contact intensity reaching the light press intensity threshold IT L ) causes the transition from the first display state to the second display state, while a later portion of the gesture (a deeper press with a peak contact intensity above the light press intensity threshold IT L  followed by reduction in intensity and lift-off). The gestures shown in FIGS.  5 B 16 ,  5 C 32 ,  5 D 42 ,  5 F 22 ,  5 G 18 , and  5 H 21  provides examples of the single gesture. 
     In some embodiments, the first input and the second input are ( 13970 ) part of different gestures. In some embodiments, the second display state is a steady augmented display state that is maintained in the user interface without requiring a sustained input from the user. Therefore, a single gesture need not provide both the first input to make the transition from the first display state to the second display state, and the second input to cause display of further squishiness display states (e.g., included the second animation and the third animation). Once a first gesture has provided the input to cause the transition into the second display state, a second gesture can be provided at a later time to cause display of the squishiness display states (e.g., included the second animation and the third animation). For example, a second input detected after detecting a first input corresponding to changing the display state from S 1  to S 2 , examples of such a first input are shown in FIGS.  5 A 9 - 5 A 17 ,  5 B 1 - 5 B 15  and  5 C 9 - 5 C 16 ). 
     In some embodiments, the device determines ( 13972 ) a terminal display state of the user interface while detecting the second input, where: the terminal display state is associated with a predefined intensity; and determining the third display state in accordance with the intensity of the contact included in the second input on the touch-sensitive surface includes: in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the contact included in the second input is below the predefined intensity, selecting a respective display state between the second display state and the terminal display state as the third display state; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the contact included in the second input is at or above the predefined intensity, selecting the terminal display state as the third display state. Thus, in some embodiments, after a certain point, no matter how much the intensity of the contact included in the second input increases, the user interface object(s) stop changing in response to further increases in the intensity of the contact. 
     For example, in some embodiments, the predefined intensity is the tolerance intensity threshold IT T . When the intensity of the contact varies in a range between the predefined intensity (e.g., the tolerance intensity threshold IT T ) and the intensity threshold (e.g., the light press intensity threshold IT L  or the deep press intensity threshold IT D ) required for the transition from the first display state to the second display state (e.g., from an initial display state S 1  to an augmented display state S 2 , or from a first augmented display state S 2  to a second augmented display state S 3 ), the device presents a respective display state between the second display state and the terminal display state according to the currently detected contact intensity. If the intensity reaches beyond the tolerance intensity threshold IT T , changes in the contact intensity above the tolerance intensity threshold causes no further feedback in the user interface, and the device maintains the last displayed state (e.g., the terminal display state) until the contact intensity drops below the tolerance intensity threshold again. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 4 - 5 B 11 ,  5 B 16 ,  5 C 24 - 5 C 28 ,  5 C 32 ,  5 F 15 - 5 F 19 ,  5 F 22 ,  5 G 10 - 5 G 15 , and  5 G 18 , and accompanying descriptions. 
     In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface of the device has ( 13974 ) a device compression tolerance. The predefined intensity is an intensity selected so that the terminal display state is displayed before the device compression tolerance is reached. For example, the device allows a certain amount of additional “squishiness” animation (e.g., further changes in display states) in response to further changes above the operation-execution threshold (e.g., IT L  or, alternatively, IT D ). However, the “squishiness” has a limit, so that the animation stops before the user presses hard enough on the touch-sensitive surface to cause fatigue or damage to the device or a component of the device (e.g., the touch-sensitive surface or intensity sensors attached to the touch-sensitive surface). 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes ( 13976 ) a set of one or more user interface objects. Transitioning the user interface from the first display state to the second display state includes manipulating the set of user interface objects (e.g., changing a location and/or appearance of user interface objects in the set of user interface objects, such as menu icons, folder icons, document icons, application icons, images icons, album icons, show/hide indicators, images, text, components, etc.). The third display state and the third animation of the user interface transitioning from the third display state to the second display state are determined based at least in part on simulated physical properties. For example, simulated physical properties include elasticity, spring coefficient, magnetic attraction or repulsion, gravitational attraction, electrostatic attraction/repulsion, brightness, color, hue, weight, and/or structural integrity of the set of user interface objects. For example, when there is a plurality of user interface objects (e.g., documents), they are treated as though they are attached to each other by springs with a predefined spring coefficient and the intensity of the respective contact is treated as a force on the edges of one or more of the documents in the set of documents. The manipulation of the user interface objects, and the simulated physical properties are illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 16 ,  5 C 17 - 5 C 32 ,  5 D 17 -D 21 ,  5 D 33 - 5 D 42 ,  5 F 11 - 5 F 22 , and  5 G 7 - 5 G 22 , and accompanying descriptions. 
     In some embodiments, user interface includes ( 13978 ) a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object. Transitioning the user interface from the first display state to the second display state includes moving the first user interface away from the second user interface object. Transitioning the user interface from the second display state to the third display state includes continuing to move the first user interface object away from the second user interface object. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 G 7 - 5 G 22  and accompanying descriptions. In FIGS.  5 G 7 - 5 G 22 , the user interface objects  138 G- 04  are overlapping images in the first display state, and non-overlapping images in the second display state. In some embodiments, the objects in the first display state need not be overlapping. For example, in some embodiments, the objects in the first display state are objects distributed in a grid view having a first spacing, and the objects in the second display state are the objects distributed in a grid view with a second spacing greater than the first spacing. 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes ( 13980 ) a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object. Transitioning the user interface from the first display state to the second display state includes moving the first user interface toward the second user interface object. Transitioning the user interface from the second display state to the third display state includes continuing to move the first user interface object toward the second user interface object. For example, in some embodiments, the objects in the first display state are objects distributed in a grid view having a first spacing, the objects in the second display state are the objects distributed in a grid view with a second spacing smaller than the first space, and the objects in the third display state are the objects distributed in a grid view without any spacing. 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes ( 13982 ) a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object. Transitioning the user interface from the first display state to the second display state includes enlarging the first user interface object relative to the second user interface object; and Transitioning the user interface from the second display state to the third display state includes continuing to enlarge the first user interface object relative to the second user interface object. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 8  (e.g., face of the smiley increases in size),  5 C 20 - 5 C 27  (e.g., size of the drop-down menu increases),  5 H 13 - 5 H 17  (size of image component  138 H- 04   g  increases relative to the size of image components  138 H- 04   d ,  138 H- 04   e  and  138 H- 04   f ), and accompanying descriptions. 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes ( 13984 ) a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object. Transitioning the user interface from the first display state to the second display state includes reducing a size of the first user interface object relative to the second user interface object; and Transitioning the user interface from the second display state to the third display state includes continuing to reduce the size of the first user interface object relative to the second user interface object. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 8  (e.g., eyes of the smiley decrease in size), and accompanying descriptions. 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes ( 13986 ) a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object. Transitioning the user interface from the first display state to the second display state includes translating the first user interface object along a predefined path on the display. Transitioning the user interface from the second display state to the third display state includes continuing to translate the first user interface object along the predefined path on the display. In some embodiments, the predefined path is a straight line. In some embodiments, the predefined path is a curve or other non-straight path. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 21  (e.g., preview icons  138 F- 06  fly out of a selected application icon along a predefined trajectory), and accompany descriptions. 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes ( 13988 ) a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object. Transitioning the user interface from the first display state to the second display state includes rotating the first user interface object on the display. Transitioning the user interface from the second display state to the third display state includes continuing to rotate the first user interface object on the display. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 D 33 - 5 D 39  (e.g., object  138 D- 18  showing the front cover of an album flips over and rotates further in response to increasing contact intensity), and accompanying descriptions. 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes ( 13990 ) a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object. Transitioning the user interface from the first display state to the second display state includes changing an opacity of the first user interface object on the display. Transitioning the user interface from the second display state to the third display state includes continuing to change the opacity of the first user interface object on the display. This is illustrated in  138 B 1 - 5 B 8  (e.g., face of the smiley increases in opacity), and accompanying descriptions. 
     In some embodiments, the second display state is ( 13992 ) a predefined display state associated with an operation associated with the first input. For example, the second display state is an open folder, an expanded menu, or an expanded list, that is displayed in response to the firs input (e.g., open menu  138 C- 06 ′ in FIG.  5 C 22  or expanded menu  138 C- 06 ′ in FIG.  5 C 24 ). The third display state is a dynamic (e.g., non-steady) display state selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., open menu  138 C 0 - 06 ′ in FIG.  5 C 26 ). For example, the third display state is dependent on the maximum intensity of the respective contact during the second input, so that there is a bit of elastic “give” or “squishiness” at the end of the animation. In some embodiments, the bit of elastic “give” or “squishiness” is proportional to the additional detected intensity of the respective contact that exceeds the intensity necessary to reach the second display state. 
     In some embodiments, the third animation is determined ( 13994 ) based at least in part on a difference between an intensity that corresponds to the second display state and an intensity that corresponds to the third display state. For example, if a maximum intensity of the respective contact is much greater than the intensity threshold needed to reach the second display state, then there is a relatively bigger difference between the second display state and the third display state and consequently there is a relatively bigger animation to transition from the third display state back to the second display state. In contrast, if a maximum intensity of the respective contact is only slightly greater than activation intensity threshold, then there is a relatively smaller difference between the second display state and the third display state and consequently there is a relatively smaller animation to transition from the third display state back to the second display state. Thus, in some embodiments, the amount by which the user interface springs back after the respective contact is lifted depends on how far the user interface was “stretched” prior to detecting liftoff of the respective contact (e.g., an animation directly from state I-c in FIG.  5 B 6  to state S 2  in FIG.  5 B 14  in response to detecting a liftoff of contact  138 B- 08  while state I-c is displayed is smaller than an animation directly from state S 3  in FIG.  5 B 7  to state S 2  in FIG.  5 B 14  in response to detecting a liftoff of contact  138 B- 08  while state S 3  is displayed). 
     In some embodiments, the first animation is displayed ( 13996 ) at a speed corresponding to a rate of change of the intensity of the respective contact during the first input. For example, intermediate display states in between the first display state and the second display state are mapped to particular intensity levels of the respective contact. Thus, if the intensity of the respective contact increases more quickly, then the animation will progress more quickly. Conversely, if the intensity of the respective contact increases more slowly, then the animation will progress more slowly (e.g., if the intensity of contact  138 B- 08  increases on touch-sensitive surface  451  slowly, then the animation shown in the sequence of FIGS.  5 B 1  through  5 B 4  occurs more slowly than if the intensity of contact  138 B- 08  increases on touch-sensitive surface  451  quickly). 
     In some embodiments, the second animation is displayed ( 13998 ) at a speed corresponding to a rate of change of the intensity of the respective contact during the second input. For example, intermediate display states in between the second display state and the third display state are mapped to particular intensity levels of the respective contact. Thus, if the intensity of the respective contact increases more quickly, then the animation will progress more quickly. Conversely, if the intensity of the respective contact increases more slowly, then the animation will progress more slowly (e.g., if the intensity of contact  138 B- 08  increases on touch-sensitive surface  451  slowly, then the animation shown in the sequence of FIGS.  5 B 5  through  5 B 7  occurs more slowly than if the intensity of contact  138 B- 08  increases on touch-sensitive surface  451  quickly). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 6H-6M  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  13950  described above with respect to  FIGS. 6H-6M . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described above with reference to method  13950  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein. For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG. 7  shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  14000  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG. 7 , an electronic device  14000  includes a display unit  14002  configured to display a plurality of user interface objects in a graphical user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit  14004  configured to receive user contacts, one or more sensor units  14006  configured to detect intensity of the user contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  14004  and a tactile output unit  14007 ; and a processing unit  14008  coupled to the display unit  14002 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  14004  and the one or more sensor units  14006 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  includes a detecting unit  14010 , a display enabling unit  14012 , a terminating unit  14014 , a generating unit  14016 , and a selecting unit  14018 . 
     The display unit  14002  is configured to display a user interface, where the user interface is in a first display state. The processing unit  14008  is configured to: detect a first portion of a gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit  14004 , including detecting intensity of a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  14004  (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ); in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, enable display of an intermediate display state between the first display state and a second display state (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ); detect an end of the gesture (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ); and in response to detecting the end of the gesture: in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact reached a predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L  or IT D ) prior to detecting the end of the gesture, enable display of the second display state (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ); and in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the respective contact did not reach the predefined intensity threshold prior to detecting the end of the gesture, terminate display of the intermediate display state and enable redisplay of the first display state (e.g., with the terminating unit  14014 ). 
     In some embodiments, the intermediate display state is selected (e.g., by the processing unit  14008 ) in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, the processing unit  14008  enables display of a plurality of intermediate display states between the first display state and a second display state (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ), where a respective intermediate display state of the plurality of intermediate display states is selected to be displayed based on an intensity of the respective contact. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: generate (e.g., with the generating unit  14016 ) an animated transition between the first display state and the second display state, wherein the animated transition includes the intermediate display state and the intermediate display state is mapped to an intensity of the contact detected (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ) at an end of the first portion of the gesture; and in response to detecting the first portion of the gesture, enable display of a portion of the animated transition between the first display state and the intermediate display state (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, detecting the first portion of the gesture includes detecting (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ) an increase in intensity of the respective contact from a first intensity threshold to an intermediate intensity threshold; and the processing unit is further configured to: after displaying the intermediate display state (e.g., with the display unit  14002 ): detect a second portion of the gesture (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ), where the second portion of the gesture includes detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact from the intermediate intensity threshold to the predefined intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the second portion of the gesture, enable display of an animated transition between the intermediate display state and the second display state (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the process unit  14008  is further configured to: while the intensity of the respective contact is at or below the predefined intensity threshold, enable display of an animated transition from the first display state to the second display state (e.g., with the display unit  14002  and the display enabling unit  14012 ), where the animated transition includes adjusting a parameter corresponding to a visual property of a set of one or more user interface objects in a predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ); detect an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ); and in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the predefined intensity threshold, enable display of a continuation of the animated transition that includes adjusting the parameter in the predefined direction in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to select the parameter from the set consisting of: user interface object size, user interface object opacity, space between user interface objects, and number of options displayed in a menu. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to detect the end of the gesture by detecting liftoff of the respective contact (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to detect the end of the gesture by detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact below an end-of-gesture intensity threshold (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to detect the end of the gesture by detecting a reduction in intensity of the contact from above the predefined intensity threshold to below the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: while detecting the gesture, detect an increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ); and in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact to the predefined intensity threshold, generate a tactile output that indicates that the second display state will continue to be displayed after an end of the gesture is detected (e.g., with tactile output unit  14007 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processor unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state by enabling display of an icon that corresponds to a menu without displaying the menu; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of a preview of the menu, wherein the preview of the menu is different from the menu; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state by enabling display of the menu (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processor unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state by enabling display of an icon that corresponds to a pop-up window without displaying the pop-up window; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of a preview of the pop-up window, where the preview of the pop-up window is different from the pop-up window; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state by enabling display of the pop-up window (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state by enabling display of an icon that corresponds to a hidden text without displaying the hidden text; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of a preview of the hidden text, wherein the preview of the hidden text is different from the hidden text; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state by enabling display of the hidden text (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state by enabling display of an icon that corresponds to a plurality of user interface objects without displaying the plurality of user interface objects; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects, where the reduced-scale representations of the user interface objects are different from the user interface objects; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state by enabling display of the user interface objects (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: enable display the user interface in the first display state by enable display of an image prior to applying a graphical effect to the image; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of a preview of partially applying the graphical effect to the image; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state by enabling display of the image with the graphical effect applied (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state by enabling display of a representation of an album; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of a preview of components of the album, where the preview of components of the album is different from the components of the album; and enabling display of the user interface in the second display state by enabling display of the components of the album (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state by enabling display of a plurality of user interface objects arranged on the display such that at least some objects overlap each other; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of the user interface objects spread apart so that at least two of the plurality of user interface objects that formerly overlapped with each other do not overlap with each other while at least two the plurality of user interface objects overlap each other; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state by enabling display of the plurality of user interface objects so that they do not overlap with each other (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state by enabling display of an image in a presentation without emphasis; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of preliminary emphasis on a portion of the image; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state by enabling display of the image with additional emphasis on the portion of the image (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state by enabling display of a current state of an electronic document; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of a beginning portion of an undo operation; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state by enabling display of a prior state of the document after the undo operation has been performed (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state enabling display of a current state of an electronic document; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of a first prior state of the electronic document after a first undo operation has been performed; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state enabling display of a second prior state of the electronic document after an second undo operation has been performed (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is configured to: enable display of the user interface in the first display state by enabling display of one or more tabs in a tabbed document interface; enable display of the user interface in the intermediate display state by enabling display of a preview of a new tab in the tabbed document interface; and enable display of the user interface in the second display state enable display of the new tab in the tabbed document interface (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     When implementing the processes  13950  shown  FIGS. 6H-6M , in some embodiments, the display unit  14002  is configured to display a user interface, where the user interface is in a first display state. The processing unit  14008  is configured to: detect a first input that includes detecting an increase in intensity of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ); in response to detecting the first input, enable display of a first animation of the user interface transitioning from the first display state to a second display state (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ), where a rate of change from the first display state to the second display state is determined in accordance with an intensity of the contact included in the first input; after the user interface has transitioned to the second display state: detect a second input that includes detecting an increase in intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ); and in response to detecting the second input, enable display of a second animation of the user interface transitioning from the second display state to a third display state (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ), where the second animation is a continuation of the first animation and the third display state is determined in accordance with the intensity of the contact included in the second input on the touch-sensitive surface; detect a reduction in the intensity of the contact included in the second input (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ); and in response to detecting the reduction in the intensity of the contact included in the second input, enable display of a third animation of the user interface transitioning from the third display state to the second display state (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the first input and the second input are part of single gesture that includes a continuously detected contact on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, the first input and the second input are part of different gestures. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  14008  is further configured to: determine a terminal display state of the user interface while detecting the second input (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ), wherein: the terminal display state is associated with a predefined intensity; and the processing unit  14008  is configured to determine the third display state in accordance with the intensity of the contact included in the second input on the touch-sensitive surface unit  14004  by: in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the contact included in the second input is below the predefined intensity, selecting a respective display state between the second display state and the terminal display state as the third display state (e.g., with the selecting unit  14018 ); and in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the contact included in the second input is at or above the predefined intensity, selecting the terminal display state as the third display state (e.g., with the selecting unit  14018 ). 
     In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface of the device has a device compression tolerance; and the predefined intensity is an intensity selected so that the terminal display state is displayed before the device compression tolerance is reached. 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes a set of one or more user interface objects. The processing unit  14008  is configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the first display state to the second display state by manipulating the set of user interface objects (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). The processing unit  14008  is further configured to determine the third display state and the third animation of the user interface transitioning from the third display state to the second display state based at least in part on simulated physical properties of the set of user interface objects (e.g., with the detecting unit  14010 ). 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object. The processing unit  14008  is configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the first display state to the second display state by moving the first user interface away from the second user interface object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). The processing unit  14008  is further configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the second display state to the third display state by continuing to move the first user interface object away from the second user interface object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object. The processing unit  14008  is configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the first display state to the second display state by moving the first user interface toward the second user interface object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). The processing unit  14008  is further configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the second display state to the third display state by continuing to move the first user interface object toward the second user interface object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object. The processing unit  14008  is configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the first display state to the second display state by enlarging the first user interface object relative to the second user interface object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). The processing unit  14008  is further configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the second display state to the third display state by continuing to enlarge the first user interface object relative to the second user interface object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object. The processing unit  14008  is configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the first display state to the second display state by reducing a size of the first user interface object relative to the second user interface object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). The processing unit  14008  is further configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the second display state to the third display state by continuing to reduce the size of the first user interface object relative to the second user interface object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object. The processing unit  14002  is configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the first display state to the second display state by translating the first user interface object along a predefined path on the display (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). The processing unit  14008  is further configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the second display state to the third display state by continuing to translate the first user interface object along the predefined path on the display (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object. The processing unit  14008  is configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the first display state to the second display state by rotating the first user interface object on the display (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). The processing unit  14008  is further configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the second display state to the third display state by continuing to rotate the first user interface object on the display (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the user interface includes a set of user interface objects, including a first user interface object. The processing unit  14008  is configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the first display state to the second display state by changing an opacity of the first user interface object on the display (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). The processing unit  14008  is further configured to enable display of a transition of the user interface from the second display state to the third display state by continuing to change the opacity of the first user interface object on the display (e.g., with the display enabling unit  14012 ). 
     In some embodiments, the second display state is a predefined display state associated with an operation associated with the first input. The third display state is a dynamic display state selected in accordance with the intensity of the respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, the third animation is determined based at least in part on a difference between an intensity that corresponds to the second display state and an intensity that corresponds to the third display state. 
     In some embodiments, the first animation is displayed at a speed corresponding to a rate of change of the intensity of the respective contact during the first input. 
     In some embodiments, the second animation is displayed at a speed corresponding to a rate of change of the intensity of the respective contact during the second input. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally, implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 6A-6M  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B  or  FIG. 7 . For example, detection operations  13904 ,  13954 ,  13960 , and  13964 , display operations  13906 ,  13910 ,  13912 ,  13952 ,  13956 ,  13962 ,  13966  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190 , optionally, utilizes or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations have been described above is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that the various processes separately described herein can be combined with each other in different arrangements. For example, the contacts, user interface objects, tactile sensations, intensity thresholds, and/or focus selectors described above with reference to any one of the various processes separately described herein optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile sensations, intensity thresholds, and focus selectors described herein with reference to one or more of the other methods described herein. For brevity, all of the various possible combinations are not specifically enumerated here, but it should be understood that the claims described above may be combined in any way that is not precluded by mutually exclusive claim features. 
     The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the various described embodiments to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the various described embodiments and their practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best utilize the various described embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

Metadata:
Filing Date: 20141107
Publication Date: 20170411
Grant Date: 20170411
Priority Date: 20120509
Inventors: BERNSTEIN JEFFREY TRAER
MISSIG JULIAN
CIEPLINSKI AVI E.
BROWN MATTHEW I.
KHOE MAY-LI
ZAMBETTI NICHOLAS
COSTANZO BIANCA C.
HART DAVID J.
VICTOR B. MICHAEL
Assignee: APPLE INC
CPC Classifications: [{"code": "G06F2203/04105", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04817", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/016", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0483", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0483", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04886", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04105", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/016", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04817", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0488", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0416", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0483", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04105", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/016", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0416", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04817", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0416", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}]
Family ID: 48468820